2018 Jeep Wrangler JK (Including Unlimited) User's Guide

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next

appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only). www.jeep.com/en/owners (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries, personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often. Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, Navigation / Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle. User Guide Second Edition WRANGLER 18JK-926-AA DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, media and warranty booklet by visiting: www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents); www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).

Jeep.com (U.S.) Jeep.ca (Canada)

*Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water. Please check the “Driving Through Water” section for more information.

3147069_18a_Jeep_Wrangler_JK_UG_091517.indd 1 10/5/17 1:56 PM This guide has been prepared to help you get Driving and Alcohol quickly acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of source for common questions. However, it is not a collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with substitute for your Owner’s Manual. blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking For complete operational instructions, maintenance driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect WARNING! manuals found on the website on the back cover The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your Important vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, and other Warning Labels in your vehicle. resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and Get warranty and other information online – you can recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any Not all features shown in this guide may apply your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, device or feature that may take their attention off the road. to your vehicle. For additional information on Never drink and then drive. Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious or your local Jeep® brand dealer. www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable done while the vehicle is moving. year, make and model of your vehicle. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.

3147069_18a_Jeep_Wrangler_JK_UG_091517.indd 2 10/5/17 1:56 PM Congratulations on selecting your new FCA ments to its products without imposing any This User Guide is not a replacement for the full LLC US FCA FROM WELCOME US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents obligation upon itself to install them on prod- Owner’s Manual, and does not fully cover every precision workmanship, distinctive styling, ucts previously manufactured. operation and procedure possible with your ve- and high quality. hicle. This User Guide has been prepared to help ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the you quickly become acquainted with the im- For more detailed descriptions of the topics road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on portant features of your vehicle. It contains discussed in this User Guide, as well as the steering wheel. You have full responsibil- most things you will need to operate and information covering features and processes ity and assume all risks related to the use of maintain the vehicle, including emergency not covered in this User Guide, the full ve- the features and applications in this vehicle. information. hicle Owner’s Manual can be accessed for free online in a printer-friendly PDF format. Only use the features and applications when When it comes to service, remember that your it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result To get the full Owner’s Manual or applicable authorized dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle in an accident involving serious injury or supplement for your vehicle, follow the appro- best, has factory-trained technicians and death. priate web address below: genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your This guide illustrates and describes the op- satisfaction. www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html eration of features and equipment that are (U.S. Residents) either standard or optional on this vehicle. HOW TO FIND YOUR www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) This guide may also include a description of OWNER’S MANUAL ONLINE features and equipment that are no longer FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our environment and natural resources. By con- available or were not ordered on this vehicle. This publication has been prepared as a ref- verting from paper to electronic delivery for Please disregard any features and equipment erence item to help you quickly become ac- the majority of the user information for your described in this guide that are not available quainted with the most important features vehicle, together we greatly reduce the de- on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the and processes of your vehicle. It contains mand for tree-based products and lessen the most things you will need to operate and right to make changes in design and specifi- stress on our environment. cations and/or make additions to or improve- maintain the vehicle, including emergency information and procedures.

1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedi- Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneu- cated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd vers, or other unsafe driving actions that can Essential Information page. A few pages further there is a key for cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to oper- getting to know the chapter order and the ate this vehicle safely may result in a colli- Each time direction instructions (left/right or relevant symbols in the tabs. There is always sion, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are a textual indication of the current chapter at fatal injury. Drive carefully. given, these must be intended as regarding the side of each even page. an occupant in the driver's seat. Special cases not complying with this rule will be Symbols properly specified in the text. Some vehicle components have colored la- The figures in this User Guide are provided by bels whose symbols indicate precautions to way of example only: this might imply that be observed when using this component. some details of the image do not correspond Rollover Warning Label to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. ROLLOVER WARNING

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Failure to use the driver and passenger seat In addition, the User Guide has been con- Utility vehicles have a significantly higher belts provided is a major cause of severe or ceived considering vehicles with steering rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a notes that the universal use of existing seat that on vehicles with steering wheel on the higher center of gravity than many passenger belts could cut the highway death toll by right side, the position or construction of vehicles. It is capable of performing better in 10,000 or more each year and could reduce some controls is not exactly mirror-like with a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven disabling injuries by two million annually. In respect to the figure. in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signifi- of control. Because of the higher center of To identify the chapter with the information cantly more likely to die than a person wear- gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may needed you can consult the index at the end ing a seat belt. Always buckle up. of this User Guide. roll over while some other vehicles may not.

2 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS MANUAL THIS USE TO HOW While reading this User Guide you will find a series of WARNINGS to be followed to prevent incorrect use of components which could cause accidents or injuries. There are also CAUTIONS that must be followed to prevent against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle.

3 4 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY STARTING AND OPERATING IN CASE OF EMERGENCY SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MULTIMEDIA CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX 6 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS INSTRUMENT PANEL...... 8 INTERIOR...... 9

7 INSTRUMENT PANEL GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

Instrument Panel 1 — Air Outlet 7 — Climate Controls 2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Power Outlet 3 — Radio 9 — Lower Switch Bank 4 — Assist Handle 10 — Power Mirror Switch — If Equipped 5 — Glove Compartment 11 — Horn 6 — Power Window Switches 8 INTERIOR

Interior Features 1 — Seats 5 — Switch Panel 2 — Power Window Switches 6 — Transmission Gear Selector 3 — Radio 7 — Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector 4 — Climate Controls

9 10 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE KEYFOB...... 13 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — HEADRESTRAINTS...... 27 KeyFob...... 13 IFEQUIPPED...... 19 Front Head Restraints ...... 27 IGNITIONSWITCH...... 14 Rearming The System ...... 19 Rear Head Restraints — To Arm The System ...... 19 Two Door Model ...... 28 Ignition Key Removal ...... 14 To Disarm The System ...... 19 Rear Head Restraints — REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — Four Door Model ...... 28 DOORS ...... 20 IFEQUIPPED...... 15 STEERINGWHEEL...... 29 How To Use Remote Start ...... 15 Upper Half Door Window Removal — If Equipped ...... 20 Tilt Steering Column ...... 29 Remote Start Abort Message ...... 15 Front Door Removal...... 20 To Enter Remote Start ...... 15 MIRRORS ...... 29 Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) . .21 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...... 29 Driving The Vehicle ...... 16 SEATS...... 23 EXTERIORLIGHTS...... 29 To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive Heated Seats — If Equipped ...... 23 Headlights And Parking Lights ...... 29 The Vehicle...... 16 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .30 General Information ...... 16 Four Door Models ...... 24 High/Low Beam Switch ...... 30 Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — SENTRYKEY...... 17 Flash-To-Pass ...... 30 Two Door Models ...... 25 Replacement Key Fobs ...... 17 Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . .30 Tip ‘n Slide Seats — Customer Key Programming ...... 18 Two Door Models ...... 25 Front Fog Lights ...... 30 General Information ...... 18 Removing The Rear Seat — Turn Signals ...... 30 Two Door Models ...... 26 Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ....31 Lights-On Reminder ...... 31

11 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND POWER WINDOWS — HOOD ...... 51 WASHERS...... 31 IFEQUIPPED...... 38 Opening The Hood ...... 51 Windshield Wiper Operation...... 31 Wind Buffeting ...... 39 Closing The Hood ...... 51 Rear Window Wiper/Washer — REMOVABLE TOP If Equipped ...... 32 REARSWINGGATE...... 51 INFORMATION ...... 39 CLIMATECONTROLS...... 33 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 52 Sunrider And Soft Top ...... 39 Power Outlets ...... 52 Automatic Climate Control Overview....33 Hard Top And Freedom Top ...... 47 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — Power Inverter — If Equipped ...... 55 Dual Top — If Equipped ...... 50 If Equipped ...... 37 Wind Buffeting ...... 51 Operating Tips ...... 37 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

12 KEY FOB To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate Your vehicle uses a key start ignition system. Push and release the key fob unlock button The ignition system consists of a Remote once to unlock the driver's door only, or twice Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob with an ignition to unlock all the doors and swing gate. When switch. the key fob unlock button is pushed, the Illuminated Entry will initiate, and the turn Key Fob signal lights will flash twice. The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld Push and release the lock button on the key key fob. The key fob does not need to be fob to lock all doors. The turn signals will pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. flash, and the horn will chirp once to ac- knowledge the lock signal. NOTE: In the ON/RUN position, the lock button is General Information Key Fob disabled. Only the unlock button is enabled. The following regulatory statement applies to 1 — Unlock all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in 2 — Remote Start — If Equipped this vehicle: 3 — Lock This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license- exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

13 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may WARNING! cause undesired operation. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of NOTE: reasons. A child or others could be seri- Changes or modifications not expressly ap- ously or fatally injured. Children should proved by the party responsible for compli- be warned not to touch the parking ance could void the user’s authority to oper- brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. ate the equipment. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to IGNITION SWITCH children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the Ignition Key Removal vehicle. • Do not leave children or animals inside 1. Place the gear selector in PARK (if parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior equipped with an automatic Ignition Switch heat build-up may cause serious injury transmission). or death. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Ac- WARNING!

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE cessory) position. • Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the CAUTION! 3. Push the key and cylinder inward and automatic transmission into PARK or the rotate the key to the LOCK position. manual transmission into FIRST gear or An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for REVERSE, apply the parking brake, then thieves. Always remove key fob from the 4. Remove the key from the ignition switch turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the lock cylinder. from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. vehicle unattended. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

14 REMOTE STARTING • Brake switch inactive Remote Start Abort Message (brake pedal not pushed) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The following messages will display in the • Ignition key removed from ignition instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails This system uses the key fob to start the to remote start or exits remote start prema- engine conveniently from outside the vehicle • Battery at an acceptable charge level turely: while still maintaining security. The system • PANIC button not pushed has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m). • Remote Start Aborted — Door Open • System not disabled from previous remote • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open NOTE: start event • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low • The vehicle must be equipped with an au- • Vehicle security alarm not active tomatic transmission to be equipped with • Remote Start Aborted — Swing Gate Open Remote Start. WARNING! • Remote Start Aborted — System Fault • Obstructions between the vehicle and key • Do not start or run an engine in a closed The instrument cluster display message stays fob may reduce this range. garage or confined area. Exhaust gas active until the ignition is turned to the ON/ How ToUse Remote Start contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is RUN position. odorless and colorless. Carbon Monox- ToEnter Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met ide is poisonous and can cause serious before the engine will remote start: injury or death when inhaled. Push and release the remote start button on • Gear selector in PARK • Keep key fobs away from children. Op- the key fob twice within five seconds. The • Doors closed eration of the Remote Start System, win- vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will dows, door locks or other controls could flash and the horn will chirp twice (if pro- • Hood closed cause serious injury or death. grammed). Then, the engine will start and the • Hazard switch off vehicle will remain in the remote start mode for a 15-minute cycle.

15 NOTE: ToExit Remote Start Mode Without General Information Driving The Vehicle • The park lamps will turn on and remain on The following regulatory statement applies to during remote start mode. Push and release the remote start button one all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in • For security, power window operation is time or allow the engine to run for the entire this vehicle: disabled when the vehicle is in the remote 15-minute cycle. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC start mode. NOTE: Rules and with Industry Canada license- • The engine can be started two consecutive To avoid unintentional shut downs, the sys- exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key tem will disable the one time push of the ject to the following two conditions: fob. However, the ignition switch must be remote start button for two seconds after 1. This device may not cause harmful cycled to the ON/RUN position before you receiving a valid remote start request. interference. can repeat the start sequence for a third ToExit Remote Start Mode And Drive The 2. This device must accept any interference cycle. Vehicle received, including interference that may Remote start will also cancel if any of the cause undesired operation. following occur: Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the unlock button on the key fob NOTE: • The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500. to unlock the doors and disarm the vehicle Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli- • Any engine warning lamps come on. security alarm (if equipped). Then, insert the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE key into the ignition and place the ignition in ance could void the user’s authority to oper- • The hood is opened. the ON/RUN position. ate the equipment. • The hazard switch is pushed. NOTE: • The transmission is moved out of PARK. The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN • The brake pedal is pushed. position in order to drive the vehicle.

16 SENTRY KEY If the light remains on after the bulb check, it Replacement Key Fobs indicates that there is a problem with the The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents electronics. In addition, if the vehicle secu- NOTE: unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling rity light begins to flash after the bulb check, Only key fobs that are programmed to the the engine. The system does not need to be it indicates that someone used an invalid key vehicle electronics can be used to start and armed or activated. Operation is automatic, to try to start the engine. Either of these operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is pro- regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or conditions will result in the engine being shut grammed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro- unlocked. off after two seconds. grammed to any other vehicle. The system uses key fobs that have an em- If the vehicle security light turns on during CAUTION! bedded electronic chip (transponder) to pre- normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for vent unauthorized vehicle operation. There- longer than ten seconds), it indicates that Always remove the Sentry Keys from the fore, only key fobs that are programmed to there is a fault in the electronics. Should this vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the the vehicle can be used to start and operate occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as vehicle unattended. the vehicle. The system will shut the engine possible by an authorized dealer. off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid Duplication of key fobs may be performed at key to try to start the engine. CAUTION! an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure. This pro- NOTE: The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not cedure consists of programming a blank key A key fob that has not been programmed is compatible with some aftermarket remote fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob also considered an invalid key, even if it is cut starting systems. Use of these systems is one that has never been programmed. to fit the ignition or lock cylinder for that may result in vehicle starting problems vehicle. and loss of security protection. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys- During normal operation, after placing the tem serviced, bring all vehicle key fobs with ignition in the on position, the vehicle secu- All of the key fobs provided with your new you to an authorized dealer. rity light will turn on for three seconds for a vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle bulb check. electronics.

17 Customer Key Programming 4. Insert a blank key into the ignition. Place General Information the ignition in the ON/RUN position If you have two valid key fobs, you can pro- The following regulatory statement applies to within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a gram new key fobs to the Sentry Key Immo- all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in single chime will sound. In addition, the bilizer system by performing the following this vehicle: Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing. procedure: To indicate that programming is com- This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC 1. Cut the additional key(s) to match the plete, the Vehicle Security Light will turn Rules and with Industry Canada license- ignition and lock cylinder key code. on again for three seconds and then turn exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- 2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition. off. ject to the following two conditions: Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position The new key is programmed. The key fob 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- for at least three seconds, but no longer will also be programmed during this pro- ference, and than 15 seconds. Then, place the ignition cedure. 2. This device must accept any interference in the LOCK position and remove the first received, including interference that may key. Repeat this procedure to program up to eight cause undesired operation. 3. Insert the second valid key into the igni- keys. If you do not have a programmed key tion. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN fob, contact your authorized dealer for de- NOTE: position within 15 seconds. After 10 sec- tails. Changes or modifications not expressly ap- onds, a chime will sound. In addition, the proved by the party responsible for compli- GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash. ance could void the user’s authority to oper- If a programmed key fob is lost, see your Place the ignition in the LOCK position ate the equipment. authorized dealer to have all remaining key and remove the second key. fobs erased from the system's memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle. The remaining key fobs must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle key fobs must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed. 18 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM Rearming The System ToDisarm The System — IF EQUIPPED If something triggers the alarm, and no action To disarm the vehicle security alarm, you will is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security need to push the unlock button on the key The vehicle security alarm monitors the ve- alarm will turn off the horn after three min- fob, or turn the ignition switch to the ON/ hicle doors, swing gate, and ignition for un- utes, turn off all of the visual signals after RUN position. If something has triggered the authorized operation. While the vehicle secu- 15 minutes, and then the vehicle security vehicle security alarm in your absence, the rity alarm is armed, interior switches for door alarm will rearm itself. horn will sound three times, and the exterior locks are disabled. The vehicle security alarm lights blink three times when you unlock the provides both audible and visible signals ToArm The System doors. Check the vehicle for tampering. when alarming. The horn will sound, the The vehicle security alarm will set when you headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or use the Remote Keyless Entry key fob to lock The vehicle security alarm is designed to turn signals will flash repeatedly for three the doors and swing gate, or when you use the protect your vehicle; however, you can create minutes. If the disturbance is still present power door lock switch while the door is open. conditions where the vehicle security alarm (driver's door, passenger door, other doors, After all the doors are locked and closed, the will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the ignition) after three minutes, the headlights, vehicle security light (located on the instru- vehicle and lock the doors with the key fob, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash for ment cluster) will flash rapidly for about once the vehicle security alarm is armed an additional 15 minutes. 16 seconds to signal that the vehicle security (after 16 seconds), when you pull the door alarm is arming. During this 16-second arm- handle to exit, the alarm will sound. If this NOTE: ing period, opening any door or the swing gate occurs, push the unlock button on the key fob The Panic Alarm and the vehicle security will cancel the arming. If the vehicle security to disarm the vehicle security alarm. You may alarm are quite different. Please take a mo- alarm is successfully set, the vehicle security also accidentally disarm the vehicle security ment to activate the Panic Alarm and the light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm by unlocking the driver's door with the vehicle security alarm to hear the differences vehicle security alarm is armed. key and then locking it. The door will be in the horn. In case one should go off in the locked but the vehicle security alarm will not future, you will need to know which mode has arm. been activated in order to deactivate it.

19 NOTE: Upper Half Door Window Removal — Front Door Removal • Unlocking the doors with the manual door If Equipped lock plungers or the driver's door lock cyl- Grasp the half door window and pull upward. WARNING! inder will not disarm the vehicle security alarm. Upper Half Door Window Installation — Do not drive your vehicle on public roads If Equipped with the doors removed as you will lose the • When the vehicle security alarm is armed, protection they can provide. This proce- the interior power door lock switches will 1. Grasp the half door window and line up dure is furnished for use during off-road not unlock the doors. the pins with the pockets in the lower operation only. door. DOORS 2. Push down to ensure the half door window is fully seated. CAUTION!

Careless handling and storage of the removable door panels may damage the seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s interior. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Door Removal Warning Label

NOTE: Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door reinstall (Max Torque: 10 N·m / 7.5 ft· lb).

20 1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) damage. 2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the WARNING! upper and lower outside hinges (using a Do not drive your vehicle on public roads #T50 Torx head driver). with the doors removed as you will lose the NOTE: protection they can provide. This procedure is furnished for use during off-road The hinge pin screws and nuts can be operation only. stowed in the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor. Door Strap/Harness Location

4. Unhook the door strap from the body hook. Be careful not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror may damage the paint. 5. With the door open, lift the door to clear the hinge pins from their hinges and remove the door.

NOTE: Door Removal Warning Label Hinge Pin Screw Doors are heavy; use caution when re- NOTE: 3. Unplug the wiring harness connector un- moving them. Hinge pin can break if overtightened during der the instrument panel by pushing the To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous door reinstall (Max Torque: 10 N·m / 7.5 ft· lb). tab at the base of the connector and steps in the opposite order. pulling down to disconnect. 21 1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any 3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward. damage. 4. Remove the trim access door from the 2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the bottom of the B-pillar. upper and lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx head driver). NOTE: The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in the rear cargo tray located under the rear load floor.

Connector Unplugged

6. Unhook the door strap from the body hook. Trim Access Door 7. With the door open, lift the door to clear 5. Unplug the wiring harness connector. the hinge pins from their hinges and remove the door. NOTE: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: Squeeze the tab on the base of the con- Doors are heavy; use caution when removing nector. This will unlock the connector them. Hinge Pin Screw tab, allowing the harness to be discon- To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous nected. steps in the opposite order.

22 SEATS Heated Seats — If Equipped You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each On some models, the front driver and passen- Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two ger seats may be equipped with heaters in System of the vehicle. indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for both the seat cushions and seatbacks. LO and none for OFF. WARNING! There are two heated seat switches that allow Push the switch once to select HI-level heat- the driver and passenger to operate the seats • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, ing. Push the switch a second time to select independently. The controls for each seat are inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli- LO-level heating. Push the switch a third time located on a switch bank near the bottom sion, people riding in these areas are to shut the heating elements OFF. more likely to be seriously injured or center of the instrument panel. killed. When the HI-level setting is selected, the • Do not allow people to ride in any area of heater will provide a boosted heat level dur- your vehicle that is not equipped with ing the initial stages of operation. Then, the seats and seat belts. In a collision, heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. people riding in these areas are more If the HI-level setting is selected, the system likely to be seriously injured or killed. will automatically switch to LO-level after • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a approximately 30 minutes of continuous op- seat and using a seat belt properly. eration. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 30 minutes.

NOTE: Front Heated Seat Switches When a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.

23 To Fold Down The Rear Seat WARNING! 60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door Models Locate the release lever (upper outboard side • Persons who are unable to feel pain to To provide additional storage area, each rear of seat), and lift it upward until the seatback the skin because of advanced age, seat can be folded flat to allow for extended releases. chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus- cargo space. Slowly fold down the seatback. tion or other physical condition must NOTE: NOTE: exercise care when using the seat You may experience deformation in the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low • Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be temperatures, especially if used for long necessary to reposition the front seat to its cushion from the seat belt buckles if the periods of time. mid-track position. seats are left folded for an extended period of • Do not place anything on the seat or • Be sure that the front seats are fully upright time. This is normal. By simply opening the seatback that insulates against heat, and positioned forward. This will allow the seats to the open position, the seat cushion such as a blanket or cushion. This may rear seat to fold down easily. will return to its normal shape over time. cause the seat heater to overheat. Sit- To Raise The Rear Seat ting in a seat that has been overheated WARNING! could cause serious burns due to the Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If increased surface temperature of the • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a interference from the cargo area prevents the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE seat. cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. seatback from fully locking, you will have In a collision, people riding in these difficulty returning the seat to its proper areas are more likely to be seriously position. injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of NOTE: your vehicle that is not equipped with If the rear seatback is not fully latched, the seats and seat belts. center shoulder belt will not be able to be • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a extended for use. If you cannot extend the seat and using a seat belt properly. center shoulder belt, make sure your seatback is fully latched. 24 • The recliner and easy entry levers should WARNING! not be used during the automatic returning Be certain that the seatback is securely of the seat to its sitting position. locked into position. If the seatback is not Tip ‘n Slide Seats — TwoDoor Models securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child This feature allows the front seats to be seats and/or passengers. An improperly rotated toward the instrument panel to allow latched seat could cause serious injury. easier entry into the rear seats. Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two Driver's Seat Door Models Pull upward on the recline lever and bring the Pull upward on the recline lever (toward the seatback to its full forward position. rear of the vehicle) and slide the entire seat Rotate the entire seat assembly toward the forward. Easy Entry Lever instrument panel.

To return the seat to a sitting position, rotate Passenger Seat the seatback upright until it locks and push In addition to Easy Entry, the front passenger the seat rearward until the track locks. seat is also equipped with Tip ‘n Slide. This NOTE: feature allows for easier entry for rear passengers. • The front passenger seats have a track memory, which returns the seat to just past Pull upward on the recline lever and slide the the halfway point of the track regardless of entire seat forward (Easy Entry). its original position. With the seat forward, pull the entire seat assembly toward the instrument panel.

25 2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward. Removing The Rear Seat — WARNING! TwoDoor Models WARNING! • In a collision, you or others in your NOTE: vehicle could be injured if seats are not Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in properly latched to their floor attach- • Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be the forward tumble position. The seat ments. Always be sure that the seats are necessary to reposition the front seats. must be latched to all floor attachments fully latched. • Be sure that the front seats are fully upright when the vehicle is in motion. and positioned forward. This will allow the Replacing The Rear Seat — rear seat to fold down easily. 3. Push down on the release bar on each Two Door Models side, and pull the seat out and away from 1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the lower bracket. Reverse the steps for removing the seat. the seatback forward. 4. Remove the seat from the vehicle. WARNING! WARNING! • To help protect against personal injury, passengers should not be seated in the • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a rear cargo area with the rear seat folded cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. down or removed from the vehicle.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE In a collision, people riding in these • The rear cargo space is intended for load areas are more likely to be seriously carrying purposes only, not for passen- injured or killed. gers who should sit in seats and use seat • Do not allow people to ride in any area of belts. your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

Seatback Release Lever 26 HEAD RESTRAINTS Front Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the risk of injury by restricting head movement in head restraint. To lower the head restraint, the event of a rear impact. Head restraints push the adjustment button located on the should be adjusted so that the top of the head base of the head restraint, and push down- restraint is located above the top of your ear. ward on the head restraint. To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as WARNING! it can go then push the adjustment button and the release button at the base of each • All occupants, including the driver, post while pulling the head restraint up. To should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints reinstall the head restraint, put the head are placed in their proper positions in restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the appropriate order to minimize the risk of neck injury Front Head Restraint in the event of a crash. height. • Head restraints should never be ad- 1 — Release Button justed while the vehicle is in motion. 2 — Adjustment Button Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event WARNING! of a collision. • A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed

27 WARNING! WARNING! head restraints in a location outside the • A loose head restraint thrown forward in occupant compartment. a collision or hard stop could cause • ALL the head restraints MUST be rein- serious injury or death to occupants of stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the vehicle. Always securely stow re- the occupants. Follow the re-installation moved head restraints in a location out- instructions above prior to operating the side the occupant compartment. vehicle or occupying a seat. • ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect NOTE: the occupants. Follow the reinstallation Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees instructions above prior to operating the to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain vehicle or occupying a seat. additional clearance to the back of the head. NOTE: Rear Head Restraint Rear Head Restraints — TwoDoor Model Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt The rear seat head restraints are not adjust- WARNING! to gain additional clearance to the back of the able. They can be removed to make it easier head. GETTING TO KNOW YOURto VEHICLE take out the rear seat. To remove the head • Do not drive the vehicle without the rear restraint, push the button on each of the two seat head restraints installed while pas- Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Model head restraint guides and pull upward on the sengers are occupying the rear seat. In a The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable head restraint. Replace the head restraint collision, people riding in this area with- head restraints. before driving the vehicle with passengers in out the head restraints installed are the rear seat. To replace the head restraint, more likely to be seriously injured or insert the head restraint rods into the guides killed. and push downward on the head restraint until locked. 28 STEERING WHEEL To Adjust The Tilt Steering Column MIRRORS 1. Push down on the lever to unlock the Tilt Steering Column steering column. Heated Mirrors — If Equipped This feature allows you to tilt the steering 2. With one hand firmly on the steering These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. column upward or downward. The tilt lever is wheel, move the steering column up or This feature will be activated whenever you located on the steering column, below the down, as desired. turn on the rear window defroster (if turn signal lever. equipped). Refer to “Climate Controls” in 3. Pull upwards on the lever to lock the “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further column firmly in place. information. WARNING! EXTERIOR LIGHTS Do not adjust the steering column while Headlights And Parking Lights driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.

Turn Signal/Lights Lever Tilt Steering Column Lever Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for headlight operation.

29 Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped Flash-To-Pass Front Fog Lights The headlights come on at a low intensity You can signal another vehicle with your level when shifted into any position other headlights by lightly pulling the multifunc- The front fog light switch is located on the than PARK (auto transmission) or when the tion lever toward you. This will cause the high multifunction lever. To activate the front fog vehicle begins to move (manual transmis- beam headlights to turn on, and remain on, lights, turn on the parking or low beam head- sion). until the lever is released. lights and pull out the end of the lever.

NOTE: Automatic Headlights — If Equipped NOTE: The Daytime Running Light, on the same side This system automatically turns the head- The fog lights will only operate with the of the vehicle as the active turn signal, will parking lights or the headlights on low beam. turn off automatically when a turn signal is in lights on or off according to ambient light Selecting high beam headlights will turn off operation and turn on again when the turn levels. To turn the system on, turn the end of the fog lights. signal is not operating. the multifunction lever to the AUTO position (third detent). When the system is on, the TurnSignals High/Low Beam Switch Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to Move the multifunction lever up or down and 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch Push the multifunction lever toward the in- the arrows on each side of the instrument to the LOCK position. To turn the Automatic strument panel to switch the headlights to cluster flash to show proper operation of the System off, turn the end of the multifunction GETTING TO KNOW YOURhigh VEHICLE beams. Pulling the multifunction lever front and rear turn signal lights. lever out of the AUTO position. back toward the steering wheel will return the NOTE: lights to low beams. NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- • If either light remains on and does not lights will turn on in the Automatic mode. flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

30 • A tone will chime if the turn signals are left The windshield wiper/washer control lever is Intermittent Wiper System on for more than 1 mile (2 km). located on the right side of the steering col- Use the intermittent wiper when weather con- umn. The front wipers are operated by rotat- Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ing a switch, located at the end of the lever. ditions make a single wiping cycle, with a For information on using the rear window variable pause between cycles, desirable. Ro- Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, tate the end of the lever to the first detent without moving beyond the detent, and the wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Wiper/ Washer” in this section for more information. position for one of five intermittent settings. turn signal (right or left) will flash three times The delay cycle can be set anywhere between then automatically turn off. Windshield Wiper Operation 1 to 18 seconds.

Lights-On Reminder Rotate the end of the lever upward to the NOTE: second detent past the intermittent settings If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo The wiper delay times depend on vehicle for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end speed. If the vehicle is moving less than lights are left on after the ignition is turned of the lever upward to the third detent past 10 mph (16 km/h), delay times will be OFF, a chime will sound when the driver’s the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper doubled. door is opened. operation. Windshield Washers WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND CAUTION! WASHERS To use the washer, pull the lever toward you In cold weather, always turn off the wiper and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is switch and allow the wipers to return to the pulled while in the delay range, the wiper will park position before turning off the engine. start and continue to operate for two or three If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers wipe cycles after the lever is released. Then, freeze to the windshield, damage to the the intermittent interval previously selected wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is will resume. restarted. If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers will operate for two or three wipe Wiper/Washer Lever cycles. Then, the wipers will turn off. 31 WARNING! Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped Sudden loss of visibility through the wind- A rotary switch on the center portion of the shield could lead to a collision. You might control lever (located on the right side of the not see other vehicles or other obstacles. steering column) controls the operation of To avoid sudden icing of the windshield the rear wiper/washer function. during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during Rotate the switch upward to the first detent windshield washer use. position for rear wiper operation.

Mist Feature Rotate the switch upward past the first detent to activate the rear washer. The washer pump Push down on the wiper lever to activate a and the wiper will continue to operate as long single wipe to clear off road mist or spray as the switch is held. Upon release, the wiper from a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is will cycle two to three times before returning held down, the wipers will continue to oper- to the set position. ate. If the rear wiper is operating when the igni- NOTE: tion is turned to the LOCK position, the wiper

GETTING TO KNOW YOURThe VEHICLE mist feature does not activate the washer will automatically return to the “park” posi- pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be tion. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper sprayed on the windshield. The wash func- will resume function at whichever position tion must be used in order to spray the the switch is set at. windshield with washer fluid.

32 CLIMATE CONTROLS Automatic Climate Control Overview

Automatic Temperature Controls

33 Automatic Climate Control Descriptions Icon Description

A/C Button Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). An LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged.

Automatic Operation The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger. Operation of the system is quite simple. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO. Refer to “Automatic Operation” in this section for more information. NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only. Recirculation Button Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. NOTE: • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Extended use of this mode is not recommended. • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging. • Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.

34 Icon Description Rear Defrost Button Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes. Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Blower Control There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position. NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower speeds.

Modes Control Turn the knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

Panel Mode Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.

35 Icon Description Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Mix Mode Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Front Defrost Mode Front Defrost Mode Turn the knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost mode is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.

36 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — To provide you with maximum comfort in the of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recircula- If Equipped Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the tion mode during Winter months is not rec- blower fan will remain on low until the engine ommended, because it may cause window Automatic Operation warms up. The blower will increase in speed fogging. 1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate on and transition into Auto mode. Vacation/Storage the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Manual Operation Override Panel. Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of This system offers a full complement of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would manual override features. The AUTO symbol run the air conditioning system at idle for like the system to maintain by adjusting in the front ATC display will be turned off about five minutes, in fresh air with the the driver and passenger temperature blower setting on high. This will ensure ad- when the system is being used in the manual control buttons. Once the desired tem- equate system lubrication to minimize the mode. perature is displayed, the system will possibility of compressor damage when the achieve and automatically maintain that Operating Tips system is started again. comfort level. Summer Operation Window Fogging 3. When the system is set up for your comfort Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in level, it is not necessary to change the The engine cooling system must be protected mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear settings. You will experience the greatest with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to pro- the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and efficiency by simply allowing the system vide proper corrosion protection and to pro- increase the front blower speed. Do not use tect against engine overheating. OAT coolant to function automatically. the Recirculation mode without A/C for long (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. NOTE: periods, as fogging may occur. Winter Operation • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system To ensure the best possible heater and de- automatically adjusts the temperature, froster performance, make sure the engine mode, and blower speed to provide comfort cooling system is functioning properly and as quickly as possible. the proper amount, type, and concentration 37 Cabin Air Filter CAUTION! WARNING! The climate control system filters out dust Failure to follow these cautions can cause and pollen from the air. Contact an autho- Never leave children unattended in a ve- damage to the heating elements: rized dealer to service your cabin air filter, hicle, and do not let children play with • Use care when washing the inside of and to have it replaced when needed. power windows. Do not leave the key fob in the rear window. Do not use abrasive or near the vehicle, or in a location acces- window cleaners on the interior surface POWER WINDOWS — sible to children. Occupants, particularly of the window. Use a soft cloth and a unattended children, can become en- mild washing solution, wiping parallel IF EQUIPPED trapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrap- to the heating elements. Labels can be The power window switches are located on ment may result in serious injury or death. peeled off after soaking with warm the instrument panel below the radio. Push water. the switch downward to open the window and • Do not use scrapers, sharp instru- upward to close the window. ments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. The top left switch controls the left front • Keep all objects a safe distance from window and the top right switch controls the the window. right front window.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUROutside VEHICLE Air Intake Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. Power Window Switches

38 NOTE: Wind Buffeting Sunrider And Soft Top • For vehicles not equipped with the instru- Wind buffeting can be described as the per- Two-Door Sunrider Open ment cluster display, the power window ception of pressure on the ears or a switches will remain active for 45 seconds helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your ve- Follow these simple steps to open the Sun- after the ignition switch is turned to the hicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the rider feature. LOCK position. Opening either front door windows down in certain open or partially 1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the will cancel this feature. open positions. This is a normal occurrence side. • For vehicles equipped with the instrument and can be minimized by adjusting the win- 2. Release the header latches from the loops cluster display, the power window switches dow opening. on the windshield frame. will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK REMOVABLE TOP position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. INFORMATION Four-Door Models Please visit http://www.jeep.com/en/wrangler- rooftop-instructions/ for instructional videos. The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger window, and the lower right switch For complete information, refer to your Owner's controls the right rear passenger window. Manual.

Step 2

39 3. Make sure to slide the plastic sleeves 4. Grasp the header and lift the top back. forward to unlock the Sunrider links. Make sure the material is folded back as shown.

Step 5

Step 3 6. Reposition the sun visors. Step 4 NOTE: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE If you are going to be driving faster than 5. Locate the straps to secure the side bows. 40 mph (64 km/h) with the Sunrider feature Wrap the straps around the bows as open, it is recommended that you remove the shown. Repeat on the other side. rear window of the vehicle. • To close the Sunrider feature, perform the above steps in the opposite order.

40 Two-Door Soft Top Down 2. Fold and place the Sail Panels on top of 3. Release header latches from the wind- your Wrangler. shield frame. Follow these simple steps to lower the Two- Door soft top. 1. Remove the side and back windows.

Step 2 Step 3

Step 1

41 4. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid 5. Release the Sunrider latch (both sides). 6. Open the swing gate and lower the top. rearward over the Sunrider link to lock in the link (Sunrider Models only).

Step 5 Step 6

Step 4 NOTE:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides of the vehicle. • To raise the soft top, perform the above steps in the opposite order.

42 Four-Door Sunrider Down 3. Grasp the front side bow behind the 4. Fold the top so that the material forms a header, and lift the top. "W" as shown. Enter the vehicle and move Follow these simple steps to open the Sun- the material into two folds. rider feature. 1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side. 2. Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame.

Step 3 Step 4

Step 2

43 5. Fold back the front section of the top and Four-Door Soft Top Down gently rest the header on top of the rear Follow these simple steps to lower the Four- portion of the deck. Door soft top. 1. Remove the side and back windows.

Step 6

NOTE: Step 5 • Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE the material to sag and may block the 6. Secure the top by using the two provided rearview mirror. Step 1 straps. Each strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro to itself; use one strap • If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph (64 km/h) with the Sunrider fea- on each side of the vehicle. ture open, it is recommended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle. • To close the Sunrider feature, perform the above steps in the opposite order.

44 2. Fold and place the Sail Panels on top of 3. Release header latches from the wind- 4. Fold header rearward, pulling the fabric to your Wrangler. shield frame. the rear.

Step 2 Step 3 Step 4

45 5. Fold the top so that the material forms a 6. Release the side bows by pushing down 7. Push the top rearward to disengage. "W" as shown. Enter the vehicle and move on the latch above the front of the rear the material into two folds. doors.

Step 7

Step 5 Step 6 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

46 8. Open the swing gate and lower the top. WARNING! CAUTION! • Do not move your vehicle until the top • Do not drive the vehicle with the rear has been either fully attached to the window curtain up unless the side cur- windshield frame, or fully lowered. tains are also open. Dangerous exhaust • The soft top is not designed to carry any gases which can kill could enter the additional loads such as roof racks, vehicle. spare tires, building, hunting, or camp- • The fabric upper doors and fabric top are ing supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it designed only for protection against the was not designed as a structural member elements. Do not rely on them to contain of the vehicle and, thus, cannot properly occupants within the vehicle or to pro- carry any additional loads other than tect against injury during an accident. environmental (rain, snow, etc.). Remember, always wear seat belts. Hard TopAnd Freedom Top CAUTION! Step 8 Freedom Top Removal • Do not run a fabric top through an auto- NOTE: Follow these simple steps to remove the front matic car wash. Window scratches and panels. Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides wax buildup may result. of the vehicle. • Do not lower the top when the tempera- 1. Fold down the sun visor, and move it to the • To raise the soft top, perform the above ture is below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the side. steps in the opposite order. top may result. • Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty. Grit may scratch the window.

47 2. Turn the rear fasteners (located on the 3. Turn the center L-shaped locks (two) from 4. Turn the rear L-shaped lock (located overhead speaker bar assembly) counter- the center of the roof panel. above the shoulder belt anchorage). clockwise until they can be removed.

Step 3 Step 4 Step 2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

48 5. Unlatch the header panel latches located • Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top, 6. Locate and disconnect the wire harness at the top of the windshield. come with a Freedom Top storage bag that on the left rear inside corner of the allows you to store your Freedom Top vehicle. panels. For complete information, refer to your Owner's Manual. Hard Top Removal Follow these simple steps to remove the hard top. 1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Free- dom Top Removal” in the previous section. 2. Open both doors.

Step 5 3. Remove the two Torx head screws that secure the hard top at the B-pillar (near Step 6 6. Remove the left-hand panel. the top of the door) using a #40 Torx head driver (Four–Door Only). 7. Remove the washer hose (next to the wire To remove the right panel, follow the steps harness) by pinching the grips on hose above except for step three. 4. Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the hard top to the vehicle (along connector and pull downward. NOTE: the interior body side) using a #40 Torx 8. Close the swing gate. head driver. • The left panel must be removed before 9. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. removing right panel. 5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure Place the hard top on a soft surface to clearance of the rear window glass. Lift prevent damage. the rear window glass. 49 CAUTION! Dual Top— If Equipped If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, • The front panel(s) must be positioned you must remove one of the tops from the properly to ensure sealing. Improper in- vehicle. stallation can cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior. • Two Door - If the soft top is removed, the • The hard top assembly must be posi- pivot brackets must also be removed from tioned properly to ensure sealing. Im- the sport bar. proper installation can cause water to • Four Door - If the soft top is removed, ensure leak into the vehicle's interior. that the pivot bracket strap is installed onto • The hard top is not designed to carry any the Soft Top pivot bracket before removing the additional loads such as roof racks, soft top from the vehicle. Remove the fasten- spare tires, building, hunting, or camp- ing supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it ers between the Soft Top pivot bracket and was not designed as a structural mem- the attach bracket to the sport bar. Pivot Bracket Strap ber of the vehicle, and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmental (rain, snow, etc.). NOTE: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE • Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the • The soft top was installed at the factory for windshield frame and bodyside, or fully shipping purposes only. removed. • The soft top and the hard top are to be used • The removal of the hard top requires four independently. adults located on each corner. Failure to follow this caution could damage the • For complete information, refer to your Own- hard top. er's Manual.

50 Wind Buffeting Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, REAR SWING GATE located in the middle of the hood opening. Wind buffeting can be described as a Push the safety latch to the left side of the The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using helicopter-type percussion sound. If buffet- vehicle, to open the hood. You may have to the key, Remote Keyless Entry key fob, or by ing occurs with the rear windows open, adjust push down slightly on the hood before push- activating the power door lock switches lo- the front and rear windows together. ing the safety latch. Insert the support rod cated on the front doors. into the slot on the hood. HOOD To open the swing gate, push the button on Closing The Hood the gate handle. Opening The Hood To close the hood, remove the support rod Release both the hood latches. from the hood panel and place it in the retaining clip. Lower the hood slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to Swing Gate Handle follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. NOTE: Close the rear flip-up window before attempting to close the swing gate (hard top models only). Hood Latch Location

51 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT • The center console 12 Volt power outlet is WARNING! powered directly from the battery (power Driving with the flip-up window open can Power Outlets available at all times). Items plugged into allow poisonous exhaust gases into your this outlet may discharge the battery and/or There are three possible 12 Volt Power Out- prevent the engine from starting. vehicle. You and your passengers could be lets in this vehicle. injured by these fumes. Keep the flip-up window closed when you are operating the • The front 12 Volt power outlet is located vehicle. below the climate controls in the Center Console, and is powered when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. The CAUTION! outlet can operate a conventional cigar lighter unit or power accessories designed Do not push on rear wiper blade when for use with a standard power outlet closing the rear flip-up window, as damage adapter. to the blade will result. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Power Outlet — Center Console

Power Outlet — Front

52 • On vehicles equipped with a rear sub- NOTE: woofer, there is also a 12 Volt power outlet • Do not exceed the maximum power of located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle. 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the This power outlet has power available di- 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is ex- rectly from the battery (power available at ceeded the fuse protecting the system will all times). Items plugged into this outlet need to be replaced. also may discharge the battery and/or pre- • Power outlets are designed for accessory vent the engine from starting. plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

Power Outlet — Rear Cargo Area

53 Power Outlet Fuses 1 — #M7 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet Rear (If Equipped)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR2 VEHICLE — #M6 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow – Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 3 — #M36 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow – Power Outlet Console Bin

54 Power Inverter — If Equipped • The power inverter switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate con- WARNING! trols. To turn on the power outlet, push the To Avoid Serious Injury or Death DO NOT: switch once. The indicator light will illumi- • insert any objects into the receptacles nate. Push the switch a second time to turn • touch with wet hands the power inverter outlet off. Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric NOTE: shock and failure. The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet, the inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be Power Inverter reset manually. To reset the inverter manually, unplug the device and plug it in again. To • A 115 Volt, 150 Watt AC power inverter is avoid overloading the circuit, check the located on the front of the center console. power ratings on electrical devices prior to • This outlet can power cellular phones, elec- using the inverter. tronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.

55 56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY — WARNING LIGHTS AND ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — IFEQUIPPED...... 58 MESSAGES...... 60 OBDII...... 66 Instrument Cluster Display Location Red Warning Lights...... 60 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) And Controls ...... 58 Yellow Warning Lights ...... 63 Cybersecurity ...... 67 Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . .59 Yellow Indicator Lights ...... 65 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ...... 67 Oil Change Required ...... 60 Green Indicator Lights ...... 66 White Indicator Lights ...... 66 Blue Indicator Lights ...... 66

57 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Instrument Cluster Display Location And The instrument cluster display consists of the DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED Controls following: The instrument cluster display features a • Compass Heading Your vehicle may be equipped with an instru- driver-interactive display that is located in (N, S, E, W, NE, NW, SE, SW) ment cluster display, which offers useful in- the instrument cluster. • Outside Temperature (°F or °C) formation to the driver. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a • ECO Display door will activate the display for viewing, and • Digital Speedometer display the total miles, or kilometers, in the • Average Fuel Economy odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display important information • Distance To Empty about your vehicle’s systems and features. • Tire Pressure Monitor System — Using a driver interactive display located on If Equipped the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are • Elapsed Time working and give you warnings when they • Vehicle Info aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls Instrument Cluster Display • Units Selection allow you to scroll through and enter the main • System Status and Warnings menus and submenus. You can access the This system conveniently allows the driver to (Door Open, etc.) specific information you want and make se- select a variety of useful information by push- lections and adjustments. ing the switches mounted on the steering • Personal Settings wheel. (Customer-Programmable Features) GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

58 The system allows the driver to select infor- • Push the MENU button to scroll through the • Key In Ignition mation by pushing the following buttons main menus (Speedometer, Fuel Economy, • Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning mounted on the steering wheel: Miles To Empty, Tire Pressure, Warnings, chime) Timer, Vehicle Info, Units, System Warning, Personal Settings) or to exit submenus. • Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) • Push the right arrow button for access to • Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a main menus, submenus or to select a per- single chime) sonal setting in the setup menu. • Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a • Push the compass button to display one of single chime) eight compass readings and the outside temperature or to exit sub menus. • Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) • Push the down arrow button to scroll downward through the submenus. • Key Fob Battery Low (with a single chime) • Personal Settings Not Avail. – Vehicle Not Instrument Cluster Display Messages in Park — automatic transmission Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons When the appropriate conditions exist, the • Personal Settings Not Avail. – Vehicle in instrument cluster will display the following Motion — manual transmission 1 — MENU Button messages: 2 — Right Arrow Button • Door Open (with vehicle graphic showing 3 — Down Arrow Button • Low Tire Pressure which door is open. A single chime sounds 4 — Compass Button • Low Fuel if the vehicle is in motion) • Service TPM System (refer to "Tire Pressure • Gate Open (with vehicle graphic showing Monitoring System" in "Safety" for further the Liftgate/back door open and a single information) chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion) • Damaged Key 59 • Check Gascap (refer to “Refueling The Ve- 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly appear different based upon equipment op- hicle” in “Starting And Operating” for fur- three times within 10 seconds. tions and current vehicle status. Some tell- ther information) 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK tales are optional and may not appear. • Oil Change Required (with a single chime) position. Red Warning Lights • ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped NOTE: — Air Bag Warning Light Oil Change Required If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator This light indicates a fault with the air bag, Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a change indicator system. The “Oil Change procedure. bulb check when the ignition is placed in the Required” message will display in the instru- ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light ment cluster display for approximately WARNING LIGHTS AND will illuminate with a single chime when a 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded fault with the air bag has been detected, it to indicate the next scheduled oil change MESSAGES will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the interval. The engine oil change indicator sys- The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in light is either not on during startup, stays on, tem is duty cycle based, which means the the instrument panel together with a dedi- or turns on while driving, have the system engine oil change interval may fluctuate de- inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as pendent upon your personal driving style. cated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative possible. Unless reset, this message will continue to and precautionary and as such must not be — Brake Warning Light display each time you turn the ignition switch considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the ON position. To turn off the message to the information contained in the Owner’s This light monitors various brake functions, temporarily, push and release the MENU but- Manual, which you are advised to read care- including brake fluid level and parking brake ton. To reset the oil change indicator system fully in all cases. Always refer to the informa- application. If the brake light turns on it may (after performing the scheduled mainte- tion in this chapter in the event of a failure indicate that the parking brake is applied, nance), perform the following procedure: GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL indication. All active telltales will display first that the brake fluid level is low, or that there 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi- if applicable. The system check menu may is a problem with the anti-lock brake system tion. Do not start the engine. reservoir. 60 If the light remains on when the parking NOTE: The light should illuminate for approximately brake has been disengaged, and the fluid The light may flash momentarily during sharp two seconds. The light should then turn off level is at the full mark on the master cylinder cornering maneuvers, which change fluid unless the parking brake is applied or a brake reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hy- level conditions. The vehicle should have fault is detected. If the light does not illumi- draulic system malfunction or that a problem service performed, and the brake fluid level nate, have the light inspected by your autho- with the Brake Booster has been detected by checked. rized dealer. the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Elec- If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair The light also will turn on when the parking tronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this is necessary. brake is applied with the ignition switch in case, the light will remain on until the condi- the ON/RUN position. tion has been corrected. If the problem is WARNING! related to the brake booster, the ABS pump NOTE: will run when applying the brake, and a brake Driving a vehicle with the red brake light This light shows only that the parking brake is pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. on is dangerous. Part of the brake system applied. It does not show the degree of brake may have failed. It will take longer to stop application. The dual brake system provides a reserve the vehicle. You could have a collision. braking capacity in the event of a failure to a Have the vehicle checked immediately. — Battery Charge Warning Light portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in This light illuminates when the battery is not either half of the dual brake system is indi- Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake charging properly. If it stays on while the cated by the Brake Warning Light, which will System (ABS) are also equipped with Elec- engine is running, there may be a malfunc- turn on when the brake fluid level in the tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the tion with the charging system. Contact your master cylinder has dropped below a speci- event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning authorized dealer as soon as possible. fied level. Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is re- This indicates a possible problem with the The light will remain on until the cause is quired. electrical system or a related component. corrected. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. 61 — Coolant Temperature Warning Light the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is be drivable; however, see an authorized corrected. This light does not indicate how This light warns of an overheated engine dealer for service as soon as possible. much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level condition. If the light turns on while driving, must be checked under the hood. safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the NOTE: A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the This light may turn on if the accelerator and — Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve- brake pedals are pressed at the same time. This light indicates when the driver or pas- hicle. If the temperature reading does not If the light continues to flash when the ve- senger seat belt is unbuckled. When the return to normal, turn the engine off imme- hicle is running, immediate service is re- ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or diately and call for service. quired and you may experience reduced per- ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat NOTE: formance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the As the coolant temperature gauge ap- stall and your vehicle may require towing. light will turn on. When driving, if the driver proaches "H," this indicator will illuminate The light will come on when the ignition is or front passenger seat belt remains unbuck- and a single chime will sound. placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi- led, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or tion and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If remain on continuously and a chime will — Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) the light does not come on during starting, sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints Sys- Warning Light have the system checked by an authorized tems” in “Safety” for further information. This light informs you of a problem with the dealer. — Vehicle Security Warning Light — Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a — Oil Pressure Warning Light If Equipped problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- depending on the nature of the problem. the light turns on while driving, stop the mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly and completely stopped and the transmission possible. A chime will sound when this light until the vehicle is disarmed. GETTING TO KNOW YOURis INSTRUMENT PANEL placed in the PARK position. The light turns on. should turn off. If the light remains on with

62 YellowWarning Lights — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) — Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light — If Equipped Off Warning Light — If Equipped — Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light This light will indicate when the Electronic This light indicates the Electronic Stability Stability Control system is Active. The “ESC Control (ESC) is off. This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys- Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will tem (ABS). The light will turn on when the come on when the ignition is placed in the Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, RUN position and may stay on for as long as ESC is activated. It should go out with the even if it was turned off previously. four seconds. engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine run- — Low Fuel Warning Light If the ABS light remains on or turns on while ning, a malfunction has been detected in the driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the When the fuel level reaches approximately ESC system. If this light remains on after brake system is not functioning and service is 2.8 gal (10.6 L), this light will turn on and a several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has required as soon as possible. However, the chime will sound. The light will remain on been driven several miles (kilometers) at until fuel is added. conventional brake system will continue to speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see operate normally, assuming the Brake Warn- your authorized dealer as soon as possible to — Engine Check/Malfunction Indica- ing Light is not also on. have the problem diagnosed and corrected. tor Warning Light (MIL) If the ABS light does not turn on when the • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ “ESC Indicator Light” come on momen- The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator RUN position, have the brake system in- tarily each time the ignition is placed in the Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic spected by an authorized dealer. ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. • The ESC system will make buzzing or click- The light will illuminate when the ignition is ing sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes in the ON/RUN position before engine start. inactive. If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, • This light will come on when the vehicle is have the condition checked promptly. in an ESC event. 63 Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illumi- CAUTION! CAUTION! nate the light after engine start. The vehicle Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Do not continue driving with one or more should be serviced if the light stays on Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause dam- flat tires as handling may be compro- through several typical driving styles. In most age to the vehicle control system. It also mised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp situations, the vehicle will drive normally and could affect fuel economy and driveability. braking and steering. If a tire puncture will not require towing. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic occurs, repair immediately using the dedi- converter damage and power loss will soon cated tire repair kit and contact your au- When the engine is running, the MIL may occur. Immediate service is required. thorized dealer as soon as possible. flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe Each tire, including the spare (if provided), catalytic converter damage. The vehicle — Tire Pressure Monitoring System should be checked monthly when cold and should be serviced as soon as possible if this (TPMS) Warning Light inflated to the inflation pressure recom- occurs. mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the The warning light switches on and a message vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la- WARNING! is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different is lower than the recommended value and/or size than the size indicated on the vehicle A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these placard or tire inflation pressure label, you referenced above, can reach higher tem- cases, optimal tire duration and fuel con- should determine the proper tire inflation peratures than in normal operating condi- sumption may not be guaranteed. pressure for those tires.) tions. This can cause a fire if you drive As an added safety feature, your vehicle has slowly or park over flammable substances Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the been equipped with a tire pressure monitor- such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire indications corresponding to each tire in This could result in death or serious injury pressure telltale when one or more of your to the driver, occupants or others. sequence. tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the 64 proper pressure. Driving on a significantly wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS YellowIndicator Lights under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat from functioning properly. Always check the and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one — Front Axle Lock Indicator Light — also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to If Equipped life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling ensure that the replacement or alternate tires Indicates when the front axle lock has been and stopping ability. and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to activated. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute function properly. for proper tire maintenance, and it is the — Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light — driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire CAUTION! If Equipped pressure, even if under-inflation has not This light indicates when the rear axle lock reached the level to trigger illumination of the The TPMS has been optimized for the has been activated. TPMS low tire pressure telltale. original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been — 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped Your vehicle has also been equipped with a established for the tire size equipped on TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when your vehicle. Undesirable system opera- This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is the system is not operating properly. The TPMS tion or sensor damage may result when in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front malfunction indicator is combined with the low using replacement equipment that is not and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked tire pressure telltale. When the system detects of the same size, type, and/or style. After- together forcing the front and rear wheels to a malfunction, the telltale will flash for ap- market wheels can cause sensor damage. rotate at the same speed. proximately one minute and then remain con- Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause tinuously illuminated. This sequence will con- the Tire Pressure Monitoring System — Sway Bar Indicator Light — tinue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. Af- If Equipped long as the malfunction exists. When the mal- ter using an aftermarket tire sealant it is function indicator is illuminated, the system recommended that you take your vehicle to This indicator will illuminate when the front may not be able to detect or signal low tire your authorized dealer to have your sensor sway bar is disconnected. pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may function checked. occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or 65 Green Indicator Lights — Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC Light — If Equipped — Front Fog Indicator Light — SYSTEM — OBD II This indicator shows when the Hill Descent If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This indicator will illuminate when the front will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can fog lights are on. This system monitors the performance of the only be armed when the transfer case is in the emissions, engine, and automatic transmis- — Turn Signal Indicator Lights “4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed sion control systems. When these systems are is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these operating properly, your vehicle will provide When the left or right turn signal is activated, conditions are not met while attempting to excellent performance and fuel economy, as the turn signal indicator will flash indepen- use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light well as engine emissions well within current dently and the corresponding exterior turn will flash on/off. government regulations. signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is Blue Indicator Lights If any of these systems require service, the moved down (left) or up (right). OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction — High Beam Indicator Light Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diag- NOTE: This indicator shows that the high beam nostic codes and other information to assist • A continuous chime will sound if the ve- headlights are on. With the low beams acti- your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable hicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) vated, push the multifunction lever forward and not need towing, see your authorized with either turn signal on. (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the dealer for service as soon as possible. • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rear- if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. ward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn White Indicator Lights off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high CRUISE — Cruise Indicator beam on, "flash to pass" scenario. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL This indicator shows that the Speed Control System is ON. 66 CAUTION! WARNING! Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could • ONLY an authorized service technician system can determine if the fuel filler cap is cause further damage to the emission should connect equipment to the OBD II possibly loose, improperly installed, or dam- control system. It could also affect fuel connection port in order to diagnose or aged. A “gASCAP” message will be displayed economy and driveability. The vehicle service your vehicle. in the odometer. Tighten the gas cap until a must be serviced before any emissions • If unauthorized equipment is connected "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indica- tests can be performed. to the OBD II connection port, such as a • If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is driver-behavior tracking device, it may: tion that the gas cap is properly tightened. running, severe catalytic converter dam- • Be possible that vehicle systems, Push the odometer reset button to turn the age and power loss will soon occur. Im- including safety related systems, message off. If the problem persists, the mediate service is required. could be impaired or a loss of ve- message will appear the next time the vehicle hicle control could occur that may is started. This might indicate a damaged Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) result in an accident involving seri- cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, Cybersecurity ous injury or death. the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the • Access, or allow others to access, problem will turn the MIL off. Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard information stored in your vehicle Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection systems, including personal infor- port to allow access to information related to mation. the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to For further information, refer to “Cybersecu- access this information to assist with the rity” in “Multimedia” in your Owner's diagnosis and service of your vehicle and Manual. emissions system.

67 68 SAFETY

SAFETY SAFETY FEATURES...... 70 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SAFETY TIPS ...... 116 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...... 70 SYSTEMS...... 87 Transporting Passengers ...... 116 Electronic Brake Control System .....71 Occupant Restraint Systems Features . .87 Exhaust Gas ...... 117 Important Safety Precautions ...... 87 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . .80 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside Seat Belt Systems ...... 88 The Vehicle ...... 117 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . .80 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS). .95 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Child Restraints ...... 102 Make Outside The Vehicle ...... 119 Transporting Pets ...... 116

69 • Brake pedal pulsations. SAFETY FEATURES WARNING! • A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end condition of the vehicle brakes and tires Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) of the stop. or the traction afforded. SAFETY The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides These are all normal characteristics of ABS. • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, in- increased vehicle stability and brake perfor- cluding those resulting from excessive mance under most braking conditions. The WARNING! speed in turns, following another vehicle system automatically prevents wheel lock, too closely, or hydroplaning. and enhances vehicle control during braking. • The ABS contains sophisticated elec- • The capabilities of an ABS equipped tronic equipment that may be suscep- vehicle must never be exploited in a The ABS performs a self-check cycle to en- tible to interference caused by improp- reckless or dangerous manner that could sure that the ABS is working properly each erly installed or high output radio jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety time the vehicle is started and driven. During transmitting equipment. This interfer- of others. this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock sound as well as some related motor noises. braking capability. Installation of such ABS is designed to function with the OEM ABS is activated during braking when the equipment should be performed by tires. Modification may result in degraded system detects one or more wheels begin to qualified professionals. ABS performance. • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the or panic stops may increase the likelihood of The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” stopping distance longer. Just press ABS activation(s). will turn on when the ignition is turned to the firmly on your brake pedal when you ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as You also may experience the following when need to slow down or stop. four seconds. ABS activates: • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” re- • The ABS motor noise (it may continue to nor can it increase braking or steering mains on or comes on while driving, it indi- run for a short time after the stop). efficiency beyond that afforded by the cates that the anti-lock portion of the brake • The clicking sound of solenoid valves. system is not functioning and that service is 70 required. However, the conventional brake Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) Brake Assist System (BAS) system will continue to operate normally if This function manages the distribution of the The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s the “Brake System Warning Light” is not on. braking torque between the front and rear braking capability during emergency braking If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear maneuvers. The system detects an emer- the brake system should be serviced as soon axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the gency braking situation by sensing the rate as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to and amount of brake application and then brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning prevent the rear axle from entering ABS be- applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This Light” does not come on when the ignition is fore the front axle. can help reduce braking distances. The BAS turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light Brake System Warning Light complements the anti-lock brake system repaired as soon as possible. (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly re- The red “Brake System Warning Light” will sults in the best BAS assistance. To receive Electronic Brake Control System turn on when the ignition is turned to the the benefit of the system, you must apply ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced continuous braking pressure during the stop- four seconds. Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). system includes Electronic Brake Force Dis- If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless tribution (EBD), Brake Assist System (BAS), on or comes on while driving, it indicates that braking is no longer desired. Once the brake Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control Sys- the brake system is not functioning properly pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. tem (TCS), Electronic Stability Control and that immediate service is required. If the (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). “Brake System Warning Light” does not WARNING! come on when the ignition is turned to the These systems work together to enhance both ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot vehicle stability and control in various driving soon as possible. prevent the natural laws of physics from conditions. acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase Your vehicle may also be equipped with the traction afforded by prevailing road Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, Control (HDC). including those resulting from excessive

71 • Driver door must be closed. WARNING! WARNING! • The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. speed in turns, driving on very slippery complete attention is always required surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities • The gear selection must match vehicle up- while driving to maintain safe control of

SAFETY of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be hill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn- exploited in a reckless or dangerous man- forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in ings can result in a collision or serious ner, which could jeopardize the user's REVERSE gear). personal injury. safety or the safety of others. • HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate Disabling And Enabling HSA Hill Start Assist (HSA) if the transmission is in PARK or NEU- TRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual This feature can be turned on or turned off. The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA To change the current setting using your back from a complete stop while on an in- will remain active. instrument cluster display, refer to “Instru- cline. If the driver releases the brake while ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to WARNING! Your Instrument Panel” for further informa- hold the brake pressure for a short period. If tion. the driver does not apply the throttle before There may be situations where the Hill For vehicles not equipped with an instrument this time expires, the system will release Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor cluster display, perform the following steps: brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while the hill as normal. 1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for pointing straight forward). The following conditions must be met in active driving involvement. It is always the 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. order for HSA to activate: driver’s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and 3. Apply the parking brake. • The feature must be enabled. objects, and most importantly brake op- 4. Start the engine. • The vehicle must be stopped. eration to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your 5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more • Park brake must be off. than one-half turn to the left. 72 6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning lower switch bank below the climate con- than the other, the system will apply the less than appropriate for the steering wheel trol four times within 20 seconds. The brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow position. “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on more engine torque to be applied to the wheel The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator and turn off two times. that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced Light” (located in the instrument cluster), 7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center mode. starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and then an additional slightly more than and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC one-half turn to the right. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also 8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and This system enhances directional control and flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC then back to ON. If the sequence was stability of the vehicle under various driving Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins completed properly, the “ESC Off Indica- conditions. The ESC corrects for over/under to flash during acceleration, ease up on the tor Light” will blink several times to con- steering of the vehicle by applying the brake accelerator and apply as little throttle as pos- firm HSA is disabled. of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter- sible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to acting the over/under steer condition. Engine the prevailing road conditions. 9. Repeat these steps if you want to return power may also be reduced to help the ve- this feature to its previous setting. hicle maintain the desired path. WARNING! Traction Control System (TCS) ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot This system monitors the amount of wheel the vehicle path intended by the driver and prevent the natural laws of physics from spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake When the actual path does not match the the traction afforded by prevailing road pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or re- intended path, ESC applies the brake of the conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, duce engine power to provide enhanced ac- appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting including those resulting from excessive celeration and stability. A feature of the TCS, the oversteer or understeer condition. speed in turns, driving on very slippery Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also can- similar to a limited slip differential and con- than appropriate for the steering wheel po- not prevent accidents resulting from loss trols the wheel spin across a driven axle. If sition. 73 The ESC system has three available operating NOTE: WARNING! modes in 4H range. The system has one To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving of vehicle control due to inappropriate operating mode in 4L range. Two-wheel drive with snow chains, or starting off in deep driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, vehicles and four-wheel drive vehicles in 2H snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to SAFETY attentive, and skillful driver can prevent range have two operating modes. switch to the "ESC Partial Off" mode by accidents. The capabilities of an ESC pushing the ESC OFF switch. Once the situ- 4H Range (4WD Models) equipped vehicle must never be exploited ation requiring ESC to be switched to the in a reckless or dangerous manner which ESC On "ESC Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn ESC could jeopardize the user’s safety or the back on by momentarily pushing the ESC This is the normal operating mode for ESC in safety of others. OFF switch. This may be done while the 4H range. • Vehicle modifications, or failure to prop- vehicle is in motion. erly maintain your vehicle, may change ESC Partial Off the handling characteristics of your ve- WARNING! hicle, and may negatively affect the per- This mode is entered by momentarily pushing formance of the ESC system. Changes to the ESC OFF switch. When in "ESC Partial • When in "ESC Partial Off" mode, the TCS the steering system, suspension, brak- Off" mode, the TCS portion of ESC (except for functionality of ESC, (except for the lim- ing system, tire type and size or wheel the limited slip feature described in the TCS ited slip feature described in the TCS size may adversely affect ESC perfor- section), has been disabled and the "ESC Off section), has been disabled and the mance. Improperly inflated and un- Indicator Light" will be illuminated. “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illumi- evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC nated. When in "ESC Partial Off" mode, This mode is intended to be used if the performance. Any vehicle modification the engine power reduction feature of vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel con- or poor vehicle maintenance that re- TCS is disabled, and the enhanced ve- ditions and more wheel spin than ESC would duces the effectiveness of the ESC sys- hicle stability offered by the ESC system tem can increase the risk of loss of normally allow is required to gain traction. To is reduced. vehicle control, vehicle rollover, per- turn ESC on again, momentarily push the • Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled sonal injury and death. ESC OFF switch. This will restore the normal when the ESC system is in the "ESC “ESC On” mode of operation. Partial Off" mode.

74 ESC Full Off When in "ESC Full Off" mode, ESC and TCS, 4L Range (4WD Models) except for the Brake Limited Differential This mode is entered by pushing and holding ESC Full Off (BLD) feature described in the TCS section, the ESC OFF switch for five seconds. are turned off until the vehicle reaches an This is the normal operating mode for ESC in In the "ESC Full Off" mode, the engine torque approximate speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). For 4L range. Whenever the vehicle is started in reduction and stability features are disabled. speeds at or exceeding approximately 4L range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability of- 40 mph (64 km/h) the ESC goes into "ESC shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to 4L fered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency Partial Off". When the vehicle speed drops range, the ESC system will be in this mode. In evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not below 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system 4L range, ESC and TCS, except for the Brake engage to assist in maintaining stability. goes back to "ESC Full Off". To turn ESC on Limited Differential (BLD) feature described “ESC Full Off” mode is intended for off- again, momentarily push the ESC OFF in the TCS section, are turned off until the switch. This will restore normal “ESC On” highway or off-road use only. vehicle reaches an approximate speed of mode of operation. The "ESC Off Indicator 40 mph (64 km/h). For speeds at or exceed- Light” will always be illuminated when ESC is ing approximately 40 mph (64 km/h) the ESC in "ESC Partial Off" and "ESC full Off". goes into "ESC Partial Off" When the vehicle WARNING! speed drops below 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system goes back to "ESC Full Off". The With the ESC in "ESC Full Off" mode, the ESC is in "ESC Full Off" at low vehicle speeds engine torque reduction and stability fea- in 4L range so that it will not interfere with tures offered by ESC and ERM are dis- off-road driving, but the ESC function returns abled. In an emergency evasive maneuver, to provide the stability feature at speeds the ESC and ERM systems will not engage above 40 mph (64 km/h). The “ESC OFF to assist in maintaining stability. The "ESC Indicator Light” will always be illuminated in Full Off" mode is intended for off-road use 4L range when ESC is in "ESC Full Off" or only. "ESC Partial Off".

ESC OFF Switch 75 NOTE: ESC Partial Off WARNING! The “ESC OFF” message will display and an When in "ESC Partial Off" mode, the TCS audible chime will sound when the gear se- portion of ESC (except for the limited slip • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS lector is placed in the PARK position from feature described in the TCS section), has functionality of ESC, (except for the lim- SAFETY any other position, and then moved out of the been disabled and the "ESC Off Indicator ited slip feature described in the TCS PARK position. This will occur even if the Light" will be illuminated. section), has been disabled and the message was previously cleared. This mode is intended to be used if the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illumi- vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel con- nated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the WARNING! engine power reduction feature of TCS is ditions and more wheel spin than ESC would disabled, and the enhanced vehicle sta- With the ESC in "ESC Full Off" mode, the normally allow is required to gain traction. To bility offered by the ESC system is re- engine torque reduction and stability fea- turn ESC on again, momentarily push the duced. tures offered by ESC and ERM are disabled. ESC OFF switch. This will restore the normal • Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC "ESC On" mode of operation. when the ESC system is in the "Partial and ERM systems will not engage to assist Off" mode. in maintaining stability. The "ESC Full Off" NOTE: mode is intended for off-road use only. To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light 2H Range (4WD Models) Or 2WD Models snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "ESC Partial Off" mode by The “ESC Activation/Malfunction ESC On pushing the "ESC Full Off" switch. Once the Indicator Light” in the instrument This is the normal operating mode for ESC in situation requiring ESC to be switched to the cluster will come on when the 2H range and on 2WD vehicles. "ESC Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn ESC ignition is turned to the ON mode. back on by momentarily pushing the "ESC It should go out with the engine Full Off" switch. This may be done while the running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction vehicle is in motion. Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been The ESC will restore to normal ESC On mode detected in the ESC system. If this light after each key on. 76 remains on after several ignition cycles, and • The ESC system will make buzzing or click- NOTE: the vehicle has been driven several miles ing sounds when it is active. This is normal; ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph the sounds will stop when ESC becomes Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon inactive following the maneuver that Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for a as possible to have the problem diagnosed caused the ESC activation. complete explanation of the available ESC modes. and corrected. The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the customer has elected to The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator WARNING! Light” (located in the instrument cluster) have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode. starts to flash as soon as the tires lose trac- Many factors, such as vehicle loading, tion and the ESC system becomes active. The Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) road conditions and driving conditions, “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator influence the chance that wheel lift or Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the This system anticipates the potential for rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel lift or roll overs, especially those Light” begins to flash during acceleration, wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. that involve leaving the roadway or striking ease up on the accelerator and apply as little When ERM determines that the rate of objects or other vehicles. The capabilities throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your change of the steering wheel angle and vehi- of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never speed and driving to the prevailing road con- cle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause be exploited in a reckless or dangerous ditions. wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others. NOTE: brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” occurring during severe or evasive driving come on momentarily each time the igni- maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to tion is turned ON. other factors, such as road conditions, leav- • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ing the roadway, or striking objects or other ESC system will be on even if it was turned vehicles. off previously. 77 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize HDC is only intended for low speed off-road flash, the engine power may be reduced and an excessively swaying trailer and will take driving. HDC maintains vehicle speed while you may feel the brakes being applied to

SAFETY the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the descending hills in off-road driving condi- individual wheels to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically tions by applying the brakes when necessary. trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when once an excessively swaying trailer is recog- the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full The symbol indicates the status nized. Off” modes. of the Hill Descent Control NOTE: (HDC) feature. The lamp will be TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. WARNING! on solid when HDC is armed. Always use caution when towing a trailer and HDC can only be armed when the follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda- If TSC activates while driving, slow the transfer case is in the “4WD LOW” position tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph And Operating” for further information. location, and adjust the trailer load to (48 km/h). If these conditions are not met eliminate trailer sway. while attempting to use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off. When enabled, HDC senses the terrain and activates when the vehicle is descending a hill. HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions.

78 The speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected. Gear Approximate HDC Set Speed 1st 1 mph (1.5 km/h) 2nd 2.5 mph (4 km/h) 3rd 4 mph (6.5 km/h) 4th 5.5 mph (9 km/h) DRIVE 7.5 mph (12 km/h) REVERSE 1 mph (1.5 km/h)

However, the driver can override HDC opera- 2. Push the “Hill Descent” button. The “Hill Disabling HDC tion by applying the brake to slow the vehicle Descent Control Indicator Light” in the Push the “Hill Descent” button or shift the instrument cluster will turn on solid. down below the HDC control speed. If more transfer case out of 4WD LOW range. The speed is desired during HDC control, the NOTE: “Hill Descent Control Indicator” light in the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed instrument cluster will turn off. in the usual manner. When either the brake or • If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW the accelerator is released, HDC will control range, the “Hill Descent Control Indica- the vehicle at the original set speed. tor Light” will flash for five seconds and HDC will not be enabled. Enabling HDC • If the ESC senses that the brakes are 1. Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW overheating the “Hill Descent Control range. Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Opera- Indicator Light” will flash for five section” in “Starting and Operating” for fur- onds and HDC will become deactivated ther information. until the brakes have cooled.

79 AUXILIARY DRIVING The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire The system will automatically update and the pressure if the tire pressure falls below the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will SYSTEMS low pressure warning threshold for any rea- extinguish once the updated tire pressures Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) son, including low temperature effects, or have been received. The vehicle may need to SAFETY natural pressure loss through the tire. be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of (24 km/h) to receive this information. will warn the driver of a low tire pressure low tire pressure as long as the condition For example, your vehicle may have a recom- based on the vehicle recommended cold exists, and will not turn off until the tire placard pressure. mended cold (parked for more than three pressure is at or above recommended cold hours) air pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the placard pressure. Once the “Tire Pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the Monitoring Telltale Light” has been illumi- by about 1 psi (7.0 kPa) for every 12°F measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a nated, the tire pressure must be increased to (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will de- the recommended cold placard pressure in temperature decreases, the tire pressure will crease the tire pressure to approximately decrease. Tire pressure should always be set order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell- tale Light” to be turned OFF. 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi- based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is ciently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pres- defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle NOTE: sure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the has not been driven for more than three When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire after a three-hour period. Refer to “Tires” in (28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac- Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still “Servicing and Maintenance” for information ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure be ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. Monitoring Telltale Light off. Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only The tire pressure will also increase as the after the tires have been inflated to the vehi- vehicle is driven; this is normal and there cle’s recommended cold placard pressure should be no adjustment for this increased value. pressure.

80 • Seasonal temperature changes will affect CAUTION! CAUTION! tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt • The TPMS has been optimized for the the actual tire pressure in the tire. from entering the valve stem, which original equipment tires and wheels. could damage the Tire Pressure Monitor- Base System TPMS pressures and warnings have ing Sensor. been established for the tire size The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable uses wireless technology with wheel rim- NOTE: system operation or sensor damage may mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire result when using replacement equip- • The TPMS is not intended to replace nor- pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each ment that is not of the same size, type, mal tire care and maintenance, nor to pro- wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire and/or style. The TPM sensor is not de- vide warning of a tire failure or condition. pressure readings to the Receiver Module. signed for use on aftermarket wheels • The TPMS should not be used as a tire NOTE: and may contribute to a poor overall pressure gauge while adjusting your tire It is particularly important for you to check system performance or sensor damage. pressure. the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly Customers are encouraged to use OEM and to maintain the proper pressure. wheels to assure proper TPM feature • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire operation. causes the tire to overheat and can lead to The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) • Using aftermarket tire sealants may tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces consists of the following components: cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may • Receiver Module tem (TPMS) sensor to become inoper- affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping able. After using an aftermarket tire ability. • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors sealant it is recommended that you take • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light your vehicle to an authorized dealership maintenance, and it is the driver’s respon- A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in to have your sensor function checked. sibility to maintain correct tire pressure, • After inspecting or adjusting the tire the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped even if under-inflation has not reached the pressure, always reinstall the valve stem with a matching full size spare wheel and tire level to trigger illumination of the “Tire assembly. The matching full size spare tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” can be used in place of any of the four road 81 tires. A low spare tire will not cause the “Tire The system fault will also sound a chime. If Tire location will be displayed as follows: Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to illumi- the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will LF = Left Front nate or the chime to sound while stowed in repeat, providing the system fault still exists. the spare location. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” rF = right Front SAFETY The “Tire Pressure Monitoring will turn off when the fault condition no Lr = Left rear Telltale Light” will illuminate in longer exists. A system fault can occur by any the instrument cluster, a “LOW of the following scenarios: rr = right rear TIRE PRESSURE” message will 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driv- NOTE: display in the instrument cluster, ing next to facilities emitting the same • If your vehicle is equipped with a matching and an audible chime will be activated when Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors. one or more of the four active road tire pres- full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it sures are low. Should this occur, you should 2. Installing some form of aftermarket win- has a tire pressure monitoring sensor, and stop as soon as possible, check the inflation dow tinting that affects radio wave can be monitored by the Tire Pressure pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and signals. Monitoring System (TPMS) when swapped inflate each tire to the vehicle's recom- 3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or with a low pressure road tire. In the event mended cold placard pressure value. The wheel housings. that the matching full-size spare tire is system will automatically update and the swapped with a low pressure road tire, the 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will next ignition key cycle will still show the extinguish once the updated tire pressures 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to have been received. The vehicle may need to TPM sensors. be ON, and a chime to sound. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph Vehicles not equipped with instrument clus- (24 km/h) will turn OFF the “Tire Pressure (24 km/h) to receive this information. ter display will inform the driver which tire(s) Monitoring Telltale Light” as long as none The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” are low but not provide actual tire pressure. of the road tires are below the low pressure will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and will The low tire ISO telltale will illuminate along warning threshold. remain on solid when a system fault is detected. with “LoTIrE” message displayed in the ODO and then it will scroll to which tire location is lower than the Placard Value. 82 • If your vehicle is not equipped with a be driven for up to 20 minutes above NOTE: matching full-size spare wheel and tire as- 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to It is particularly important, for you to regu- sembly, it does not have a tire pressure receive this information. larly check the tire pressure in all of your tires monitoring sensor in the spare tire. The and to maintain the proper pressure. Premium System — If Equipped TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) pressure. If you install the spare tire in The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the following components: place of a road tire that has a pressure uses wireless technology with wheel rim- • Receiver Module below the low-pressure warning limit, upon mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire the next ignition key cycle, a chime will pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Telltale Light” will turn ON. After driving pressure readings to the Receiver Module. Messages, which display in the instrument the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pres- 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure sures Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. For each subsequent ignition key A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in cycle, a chime will sound and the “Tire the spare wheel, if the vehicle is equipped Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will with a matching full-size spare wheel and tire flash on and off for 75 seconds and then assembly. The matching full-size spare tire remain on solid. Once you repair or replace can be used in place of any of the four road the original road tire, and reinstall it on the tires. vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four Tire Pressure Monitor Display active road tires. The vehicle may need to 83 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure different color and the Tire Pressure Monitor- Warnings ing Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale SAFETY NOTE: Light will illuminate in the instru- When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may ment cluster, and an audible chime need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi will be activated, when one or more of the (28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac- four active road tire pressures are low. In ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure addition, the instrument cluster will display Monitoring Telltale Light off. an "Inflate to XX" message. A graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) The vehicle may need to be driven for up to highlighted or in a different color will also be 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to displayed. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis- receive this information. play” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Tire Pressure Monitor Display Service TPM System Warning Panel” for further information. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” Should a low tire condition occur on any of NOTE: will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and the four active road tire(s), you should stop as Your system can be set to display pressure remain on solid when a system fault is de- soon as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) units in PSI, kPa, or BAR. tected. The system fault will also sound a that is highlighted or shown in a different chime. The instrument cluster will display a color on the graphic display to the vehicle’s “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a recommended cold tire pressure inflation minimum of five seconds. This message is value, as shown in the “Inflate to XX” mes- then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“ sage. The system will automatically update, in place of the pressure value(s), indicating the graphic display of the pressure value(s) which Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is will no longer be highlighted or shown in a not being received.

84 If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence that the matching full-size spare tire is hicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph will repeat, providing the system fault still swapped with a low pressure road tire, the (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the next ignition switch cycle will still show the Telltale Light” will flash on and off for “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" be ON, a chime to sound, an "Inflate to XX" addition, the instrument cluster will display message will not be present, and a pressure message to appear in the instrument clus- a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a value will be displayed instead of dashes. A ter, and the graphic display will still show minimum of five seconds and then display system fault can occur by any of the following: the low tire pressure value highlighted or dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. shown in a different color. Driving the ve- For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, • Jamming due to electronic devices or driv- hicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph a chime will sound, the “Tire Pressure ing next to facilities emitting the same (24 km/h) will turn OFF the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors. Monitoring Telltale Light” as long as none off for 75 seconds and then remain on • Installing some form of aftermarket window of road tires are below the low pressure solid, and the instrument cluster will dis- tinting that affects radio wave signals. warning threshold. play a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message • Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or • If your vehicle is not equipped with a for a minimum of five seconds and then wheel housings. matching full-size spare wheel and tire as- display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure sembly, it does not have a tire pressure value. • Using tire chains on the vehicle. monitoring sensor in the spare tire. The • Once you repair or replace the original road • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place sensors. pressure. If you install the spare tire in of the spare tire, the TPMS will update place of a road tire that has a pressure automatically. NOTE: below the low-pressure warning limit, upon • If your vehicle is equipped with a matching the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire In addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will re- Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic has a tire pressure monitoring sensor, and main ON, a chime will sound, and the in the instrument cluster will display a new can be monitored by the Tire Pressure instrument cluster will still display a high- pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long Monitoring System (TPMS) when swapped lighted or different color pressure value in as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure with a low pressure road tire. In the event the graphic display. After driving the ve- warning limit in any of the four active road 85 tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the General Information up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in TPMS will no longer chime or display the The following regulatory statement applies to order for the TPMS to receive this informa- “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message in the all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in tion. instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain

SAFETY this vehicle: in place of the pressure values. TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four Rules and with Industry Canada license- The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) tires equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive ject to the following two conditions: with wheel and tire assemblies that do not the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above have TPMS Sensors, such as when installing 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the (1) This device may not cause harmful inter- winter wheel and tire assemblies on your "TPM Telltale Light" will flash on and off for ference, and 75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument vehicle. (2) This device must accept any interference cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYS- received, including interference that may To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four TEM” message and then display pressure cause undesired operation. wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with values in place of the dashes. On the next tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Moni- ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" NOTE: toring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle message will no longer be displayed as long Changes or modifications not expressly ap- for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The as no system fault exists. proved by the party responsible for compli- TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" ance could void the user’s authority to oper- will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then ate the equipment. remain on. The instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.

86 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a 7. The driver and front passenger seats rear-facing child restraint) must ride in should be moved back as far as practical SYSTEMS the front passenger seat, move the seat as to allow the front air bags room to inflate. Some of the most important safety features in far back as possible and use the proper 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle are the restraint systems: child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy- in this section for further information). ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate Occupant Restraint Systems Features 3. Children that are not big enough to wear forcefully into the space between occu- • Seat Belt Systems the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to pants and the door and occupants could “Child Restraints” in this section for fur- be injured. • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags ther information) should be secured in a 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs • Child Restraints vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints to be modified to accommodate a dis- or belt-positioning booster seats. Older Some of the safety features described in this abled person, refer to the “Customer As- children who do not use child restraints or section may be standard equipment on some sistance” section for customer service belt-positioning booster seats should ride models, or may be optional equipment on others. contact information. properly buckled up in a vehicle with a If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer. rear seat. WARNING! Important Safety Precautions 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder Please pay close attention to the information belt behind them or under their arm. • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying pas- in this section. It tells you how to use your 5. You should read the instructions provided senger front air bag can cause death or restraint system properly, to keep you and with your child restraint to make sure that serious injury to a child 12 years or your passengers as safe as possible. you are using it properly. younger, including a child in a rear- Here are some simple steps you can take to mini- 6. All occupants should always wear their lap facing child restraint. mize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: and shoulder belts properly. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a 1. Children 12 years old and under should vehicle with a rear seat. always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. 87 Seat Belt Systems Initial Indication Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning Buckle up even though you are an excellent If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed driver, even on short trips. Someone on the switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi- until the driver and occupied outboard front SAFETY road may be a poor driver and could cause a tion, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The collision that includes you. This can happen the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if driver should instruct all occupants to buckle far away from home or on your own street. equipped with outboard front passenger seat their seat belts. BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition Research has shown that seat belts save switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi- Change of Status lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of tion the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on injuries in a collision. Some of the worst If the driver or outboard front seat passenger and remain on until both outboard front seat (if equipped with outboard front passenger injuries happen when people are thrown from belts are buckled. The outboard front passen- seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility ger seat BeltAlert is not active when an out- while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert of ejection and the risk of injury caused by board front passenger seat is unoccupied. striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in warning sequence will begin until the seat a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. BeltAlert Warning Sequence belts are buckled again. The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert when the vehicle is moving above a specified (BeltAlert) is not active when the outboard front passen- vehicle speed range and the driver or out- ger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped) board front seat passenger is unbuckled (if triggered when an animal or other items are equipped with outboard front passenger seat placed on the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It the driver and outboard front seat passenger BeltAlert is not active when the outboard is recommended that pets be restrained in (if equipped with outboard front passenger front passenger seat is unoccupied). The the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking Belt Alert feature is active whenever the igni- the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, tion switch is in the START or ON/RUN posi- an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert and cargo is properly stowed. tion. warning sequence has completed, the Seat 88 BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not WARNING! WARNING! • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a recommend deactivating BeltAlert. • Relying on the air bags alone could lead seat and using a seat belt properly. Oc- to more severe injuries in a collision. The NOTE: cupants, including the driver, should al- air bags work with your seat belt to If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the ways wear their seat belts whether or not restrain you properly. In some collisions, driver or outboard front seat passenger (if an air bag is also provided at their seat- the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always equipped with outboard front passenger seat ing position to minimize the risk of se- wear your seat belt even though you have vere injury or death in the event of a BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Re- air bags. minder Light will turn on and remain on until • In a collision, you and your passengers crash. • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could the driver and outboard front seat passenger can suffer much greater injuries if you make your injuries in a collision much seat belts are buckled. are not properly buckled up. You can worse. You might suffer internal injuries, strike the interior of your vehicle or other Lap/Shoulder Belts or you could even slide out of the seat passengers, or you can be thrown out of belt. Follow these instructions to wear All seating positions in your vehicle are the vehicle. Always be sure you and your seat belt safely and to keep your equipped with lap/shoulder belts. others in your vehicle are buckled up passengers safe, too. properly. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only • Two people should never be belted into a • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, single seat belt. People belted together during very sudden stops or collisions. This inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli- can crash into one another in a collision, feature allows the shoulder part of the seat sion, people riding in these areas are hurting one another badly. Never use a belt to move freely with you under normal more likely to be seriously injured or lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more conditions. However, in a collision the seat killed. belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking • Do not allow people to ride in any area of than one person, no matter what their the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out your vehicle that is not equipped with size. of the vehicle. seats and seat belts.

89 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions WARNING! WARNING! 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is • A lap belt worn too high can increase the dangerous. Your body could strike the back and adjust the seat. risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt SAFETY inside surfaces of the vehicle in a colli- forces won’t be at the strong hip and 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back sion, increasing head and neck injury. A pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. of the front seat, and next to your arm in seat belt worn under the arm can cause Always wear the lap part of your seat belt the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as as low as possible and keep it snug. rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull • A twisted seat belt may not protect you shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up properly. In a collision, it could even cut your shoulder so that your strongest the webbing as far as necessary to allow into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat bones will take the force in a collision. the seat belt to go around your lap. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will against your body, without twists. If you not protect you from injury during a can’t straighten a seat belt in your ve- collision. You are more likely to hit your hicle, take it to your authorized dealer head in a collision if you do not wear immediately and have it fixed. • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder buckle will not protect you properly. The belt are meant to be used together. • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart lap portion could ride too high on your in a collision and leave you with no body, possibly causing internal injuries. protection. Inspect the seat belt system Always buckle your seat belt into the periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or buckle nearest you. • A seat belt that is too loose will not loose parts. Damaged parts must be re- protect you properly. In a sudden stop, placed immediately. Do not disassemble Pulling Out The Latch Plate you could move too far forward, increas- or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a 1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate ing the possibility of injury. Wear your 2 — Seat Belt Buckle seat belt snugly. collision.

90 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor WARNING! insert the latch plate into the buckle until Lockout you hear a “click.” If the rear seatback is not fully upright and This feature is designed to lock the retractor locked and the rear center lap/shoulder 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and whenever the rear seatback is not fully belt can be pulled out of the retractor, lies low across your hips, below your ab- latched. This prevents someone from wearing immediately take the vehicle to your au- domen. To remove slack in the lap belt the rear center lap/shoulder belt when the thorized dealer for service. Failure to fol- portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To rear seatback is not fully latched. low this warning could result in serious loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the injury or death. NOTE: latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot be seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure pulled out, check that the rear seatback is the seat belt in a collision. fully latched. If the rear seatback is properly Use the following procedure to untwist a 5. Position the shoulder belt across the latched and the rear center lap/shoulder belt twisted lap/shoulder belt. shoulder and chest with minimal, if any still cannot be pulled out, the Automatic- 1. Position the latch plate as close as pos- slack so that it is comfortable and not Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be acti- sible to the anchor point. resting on your neck. The retractor will vated. To reset this feature you must let all of withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. the seat belt webbing return into the retrac- 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) tor. You will not be able to pull out more above the latch plate, grasp and twist the 6. To release the seat belt, push the red webbing until all of the webbing has been seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a button on the buckle. The seat belt will returned back into the retractor. fold that begins immediately above the automatically retract to its stowed posi- latch plate. tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate WARNING! 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the down the webbing to allow the seat belt to folded webbing. The folded webbing must retract fully. The rear center lap/shoulder belt is enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. equipped with a lock-out feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in the fully up- 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it right and locked position when occupied. clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. 91 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage NOTE: Seat Belt Extender The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor- In the driver and front passenger seats, the If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, age is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted even when the webbing is fully extended and upward or downward to position the seat belt feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to SAFETY the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage be adjusted in the upward position without away from your neck. Push or squeeze the (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your pushing or squeezing the release button. To anchorage button to release the anchorage, authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, and move it up or down to the position that Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should pull downward on the shoulder belt anchor- serves you best. be used only if the existing seat belt is not age until it is locked into position. long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is WARNING! not required for a different occupant, it must be removed. • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much WARNING! worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is belt. Follow these instructions to wear physically required in order to properly your seat belt safely and to keep your fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT passengers safe, too. USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front Adjustable Upper Anchorage • Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you slack so that it is comfortable and not and the center of the occupant’s body is will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a resting on your neck. The retractor will LESS than 6 inches. lower position, and if you are taller than aver- withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not age, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage • Misadjustment of the seat belt could needed can increase the risk of serious in a higher position. After you release the an- reduce the effectiveness of the safety injury or death in a collision. Only use chorage button, try to move it up or down to belt in a crash. the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt make sure that it is locked in position. 92 Position the lap belt snug and low below the The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu- WARNING! abdomen and across the strong bones of the pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air is not long enough and only use in the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest bags, the pretensioners are single use items. recommended seating positions. Re- and away from the neck. Never place the A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag move and store the Seat Belt Extender shoulder belt behind the back or under the must be replaced immediately. when not needed. arm. Energy Management Feature Seat Belt Pretensioner Seat Belts And Pregnant Women The front seat belt system is equipped with The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help pretensioning devices that are designed to further reduce the risk of injury in the event of remove slack from the seat belt in the event a collision. The seat belt system has a retrac- of a collision. These devices may improve the tor assembly that is designed to release web- performance of the seat belt by removing bing in a controlled manner. slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The Pregnant Women And Seat Belts seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.

93 Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder (ALR) belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in The seat belts in the passenger seating posi- the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking

SAFETY tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto- Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used a seating position that has a seat belt with to secure a child restraint system. For addi- this feature. Children 12 years old and under tional information, refer to “Installing Child should always be properly restrained in a Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” un- vehicle with a rear seat. der the “Child Restraints” section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the lock- WARNING! ing feature for each seating position. ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (Four-Door Models) • Never place a rear-facing child restraint If the passenger seating position is equipped in front of an air bag. A deploying pas- with an ALR and is being used for normal senger front air bag can cause death or usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far serious injury to a child 12 years or enough to comfortably wrap around the occu- younger, including a child in a rear- pant’s mid-section so as to not activate the facing child restraint. ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow vehicle with a rear seat. the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode webbing necessary to comfortably wrap ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder Retractor (Two-Door Models) around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the belt. latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down- "click." ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.

94 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat • Knee Impact Bolsters WARNING! belt retracts, you will hear a clicking • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags sound. This indicates the seat belt is now used to install rear-facing or forward- in the Automatic Locking Mode. facing child restraints that have a har- • Seat Belt Buckle Switch ness for restraining the child. • Supplemental Side Air Bags How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode • Front and Side Impact Sensors Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) • Seat Belt Pretensioners and allow it to retract completely to disen- Some of the safety features described in this gage the Automatic Locking Mode and acti- section may be standard equipment on some • Seat Track Position Sensors vate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock- models, or may be optional equipment on Air Bag Warning Light ing mode. others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer. The ORC monitors the readiness of the WARNING! electronic parts of the air bag system when- The air bag system must be ready to protect ever the ignition switch is in the START or • The seat belt assembly must be replaced you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in if the switchable Automatic Locking Re- Controller (ORC) monitors the internal cir- the OFF position or in the ACC position, the tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat cuits and interconnecting wiring associated air bag system is not on and the air bags will belt function is not working properly with the electrical Air Bag System Compo- not inflate. when checked according to the proce- nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the dures in the Service Manual. following Air Bag System Components: The ORC contains a backup power supply • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly system that may deploy the air bag system could increase the risk of injury in colli- Air Bag System Components even if the battery loses power or it becomes sions. • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) disconnected prior to deployment. • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing • Air Bag Warning Light The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately the seat belt or children who are using • Steering Wheel and Column booster seats. The locked mode is only four to eight seconds for a self-check when • Instrument Panel the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN 95 position. After the self-check, the Air Bag NOTE: The driver front air bag is mounted in the Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects If the speedometer, tachometer, or any en- center of the steering wheel. The passenger a malfunction in any part of the system, it gine related gauges are not working, the Oc- front air bag is mounted in the instrument turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either cupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also panel, above the glove compartment. The SAFETY momentarily or continuously. A single chime be disabled. In this condition the air bags words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are em- will sound to alert you if the light comes on may not be ready to inflate for your protec- bossed on the air bag covers. again after initial startup. tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag WARNING! Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your diagnostics also record the nature of the instrument panel could mean you won’t malfunction. While the air bag system is have the air bag system to protect you in a designed to be maintenance free, if any of collision. If the light does not come on as a the following occurs, have an authorized bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the dealer service the air bag system immedi- vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have ately. Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster an authorized dealer service the air bag Locations • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come system immediately. on during the four to eight seconds when 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN Front Air Bags Bags position. 2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact This vehicle has front air bags and lap/ Bolsters • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after shoulder belts for both the driver and front the four to eight-second interval. passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. 96 The first stage inflator is triggered immedi- WARNING! ately during an impact that requires air bag WARNING! • Do not put anything on or around the air • Being too close to the steering wheel or deployment. A low energy output is used in bag covers or attempt to open them instrument panel during front air bag less severe collisions. A higher energy output manually. You may damage the air bags deployment could cause serious injury, is used for more severe collisions. and you could be injured because the air including death. Air bags need room to This vehicle may be equipped with a driver bags may no longer be functional. The inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending and/or front passenger seat belt buckle protective covers for the air bag cushions your arms to reach the steering wheel or switch that detects whether the driver or front are designed to open only when the air instrument panel. passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt • Never place a rear-facing child restraint bags are inflating. • in front of an air bag. A deploying pas- buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of Relying on the air bags alone could lead to senger front air bag can cause death or the Advanced Front Air Bags. more severe injuries in a collision. The air serious injury to a child 12 years or bags work with your seat belt to restrain This vehicle may be equipped with driver you properly. In some collisions, air bags younger, including a child in a rear- and/or front passenger seat track position facing child restraint. won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of belts even though you have air bags. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat vehicle with a rear seat. position. Front Air Bag Operation Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features WARNING! Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi- The Advanced Front Air Bag system has mul- tional protection by supplementing the seat tistage driver and front passenger air bags. • No objects should be placed over or near belts. Front air bags are not expected to This system provides output appropriate to the air bag on the instrument panel or reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or the severity and type of collision as deter- steering wheel because any such objects rollover collisions. The front air bags will not mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller could cause harm if the vehicle is in a deploy in all frontal collisions, including (ORC), which may receive information from collision severe enough to cause the air some that may produce substantial vehicle the front impact sensors (if equipped) or bag to inflate. damage — for example, some pole collisions, other system components. truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. 97 On the other hand, depending on the type Knee Impact Bolsters The SABs may help to reduce the risk of and location of impact, front air bags may occupant injury during certain side impacts, The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end in addition to the injury reduction potential knees of the driver and front passenger, and damage but that produce a severe initial provided by the seat belts and body structure. SAFETY deceleration. position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and WARNING! damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee deployed. impact bolsters in any way. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in • Do not mount any accessories to the all collisions, and also are needed to help knee impact bolsters such as alarm keep you in position, away from an inflating lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. air bag. Supplemental Side Air Bags When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Location A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated (SABs) to inflate the front air bags. This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the The steering wheel hub trim cover and the Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The upper passenger side of the instrument panel Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam separate and fold out of the way as the air (SABs) are located in the outboard side of the into the space between the occupant and the bags inflate to their full size. The front air front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the with such a high force that it could injure blink your eyes. The front air bags then seat trim on the outboard side of the seats. occupants if they are not seated properly, or if quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. 98 items are positioned in the area where the SAB side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good WARNING! injury from a deploying air bag. indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags • Seat belts (and child restraints where should have deployed. appropriate) are necessary for your pro- WARNING! tection in all collisions. They also help The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side keep you in position, away from an in- Do not use accessory seat covers or place collisions, including some collisions at cer- flating Side Air Bag. To get the best objects between you and the Side Air tain angles, or some side collisions that do protection from the Side Air Bags, occu- Bags; the performance could be adversely not impact the area of the passenger com- pants must wear their seat belts properly affected and/or objects could be pushed partment. The Side Air Bags may deploy and sit upright with their backs against into you, causing serious injury. during angled or offset frontal collisions the seats. Children must be properly where the front air bags deploy. restrained in a child restraint or booster Side Impacts seat that is appropriate for the size of the Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat child. The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Controller (ORC) determines whether the de- WARNING! ployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular WARNING! impact event is appropriate, based on the • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do severity and type of collision. The side impact • Occupants, including children, who are not lean against the door or window. Sit sensors aid the ORC in determining the ap- up against or very close to Side Air Bags upright in the center of the seat. • Being too close to the Side Air Bags propriate response to impact events. The sys- can be seriously injured or killed. Occu- during deployment could cause you to tem is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags pants, including children, should never be severely injured or killed. on the impact side of the vehicle during lean on or sleep against the door, side • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could windows, or area where the side air bags impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant lead to more severe injuries in a colli- inflate, even if they are in an infant or protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags sion. The Side Air Bags work with your child restraint. deploy independently; a left side impact de- seat belt to restrain you properly. In ploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right- 99 • Front and Side Impact Sensors • As the air bags deflate, you may see some WARNING! • Seat Belt Pretensioners smoke-like particles. The particles are a some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t normal by-product of the process that gen- deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt • Seat Track Position Sensors erates the non-toxic gas used for air bag SAFETY even though you have Side Air Bags. If A Deployment Occurs inflation. These airborne particles may irri- tate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you NOTE: The front air bags are designed to deflate have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area Air bag covers may not be obvious in the immediately after deployment. with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, interior trim, but they will open during air bag move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, deployment. NOTE: see your doctor. If these particles settle on Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in your clothing, follow the garment manufac- Air Bag System Components all collisions. This does not mean something turer’s instructions for cleaning. is wrong with the air bag system. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags monitors the internal circuits and intercon- If you do have a collision which deploys the have deployed. If you are involved in another necting wiring associated with electrical Air air bags, any or all of the following may occur: collision, the air bags will not be in place to Bag System Components listed below: • The air bag material may sometimes cause protect you. • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) abrasions and/or skin reddening to the oc- WARNING! • Air Bag Warning Light cupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope • Steering Wheel and Column Deployed air bags and seat belt preten- burns or those you might get sliding along a sioners cannot protect you in another col- • Instrument Panel carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not lision. Have the air bags, seat belt preten- • Knee Impact Bolsters caused by contact with chemicals. They are sioners, and the seat belt retractor not permanent and normally heal quickly. assemblies replaced by an authorized • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags However, if you haven’t healed significantly dealer immediately. Also, have the Occu- • Seat Belt Buckle Switch within a few days, or if you have any blis- pant Restraint Controller System serviced tering, see your doctor immediately. as well. • Supplemental Side Air Bags 100 NOTE: Enhanced Accident Response System Reset WARNING! • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the Procedure • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of interior trim, but they will open during air In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re- the air bag system yourself. Be sure to bag deployment. sponse System functions after an event, the tell anyone who works on your vehicle • After any collision, the vehicle should be ignition switch must be changed from igni- that it has an air bag system. taken to an authorized dealer immediately. tion START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Care- • Do not attempt to modify any part of your fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the air bag system. The air bag may inflate Enhanced Accident Response System engine compartment and on the ground near accidentally or may not function prop- the engine compartment and fuel tank before In the event of an impact, if the communica- erly if modifications are made. Take your resetting the system and starting the engine. tion network remains intact, and the power vehicle to an authorized dealer for any remains intact, depending on the nature of Maintaining Your Air Bag System air bag system service. If your seat, in- the event, the ORC will determine whether to cluding your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ- have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys- WARNING! ing removal or loosening/tightening of tem perform the following functions: • Modifications to any part of the air bag seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle • Cut off fuel to the engine. system could cause it to fail when you to your authorized dealer. Only manufac- • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery need it. You could be injured if the air turer approved seat accessories may be has power or until the hazard light button is bag system is not there to protect you. used. If it is necessary to modify the air pressed. The hazard lights can be deacti- Do not modify the components or wiring, bag system for persons with disabilities, vated by pressing the hazard light button. including adding any kind of badges or contact your authorized dealer. stickers to the steering wheel hub trim • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on cover or the upper right side of the in- as long as the battery has power. strument panel. Do not modify the front • Unlock the power door locks. bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

101 Event Data Recorder (EDR) NOTE: Children 12 years or younger should ride EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if properly buckled up in a rear seat, if avail- This vehicle is equipped with an event data a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data able. According to crash statistics, children recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR are recorded by the EDR under normal driving are safer when properly restrained in the rear

SAFETY is to record, in certain crash or near crash- conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, seats rather than in the front. like situations, such as an air bag deployment gender, age, and crash location) are re- or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist corded. However, other parties, such as law WARNING! in understanding how a vehicle’s systems enforcement, could combine the EDR data performed. The EDR is designed to record with the type of personally identifying data In a collision, an unrestrained child can data related to vehicle dynamics and safety routinely acquired during a crash investiga- become a projectile inside the vehicle. systems for a short period of time, typically tion. The force required to hold even an infant 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is on your lap could become so great that you designed to record such data as: To read data recorded by an EDR, special could not hold the child, no matter how equipment is required, and access to the strong you are. The child and others could • How various systems in your vehicle were vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to be badly injured or killed. Any child riding operating; the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such in your vehicle should be in a proper re- • Whether or not the driver and passenger as law enforcement, that have the special straint for the child’s size. safety belts were buckled/fastened; equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. There are different sizes and types of re- • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing straints for children from newborn size to the the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, Child Restraints child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s • How fast the vehicle was traveling. Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled Manual to make sure you have the correct up at all times, including babies and chil- These data can help provide a better under- seat for your child. Carefully read and follow dren. Every state in the United States, and standing of the circumstances in which all the instructions and warnings in the child every Canadian province, requires that small crashes and injuries occur. restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the la- children ride in proper restraint systems. This bels attached to the child restraint. is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. 102 Before buying any restraint system, make NOTE: • Canadian residents should refer to sure that it has a label certifying that it meets Transport Canada’s website for additional • For additional information, refer to all applicable Safety Standards. You should information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm also make sure that you can install it in the motorvehiclesafety/ or call: 1–888–327–4236 vehicle where you will use it. safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Children who are two years old or younger and who Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, Infants and Toddlers have not reached the height or weight limits of their facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, Small Children outgrown the height or weight limit of their facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle rear-facing child restraint Children who have outgrown their forward-facing Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, Larger Children child restraint, but are too small to properly fit seated in the rear seat of the vehicle the vehicle’s seat belt Children Too Large Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle for Child Restraints the height or weight limit of their booster seat

103 Infant And Child Restraints All children whose weight or height is above WARNING! the forward-facing limit for the child seat Safety experts recommend that children ride should use a belt-positioning booster seat rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying pas- until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If SAFETY years old or until they reach either the height senger front air bag can cause death or the child cannot sit with knees bent over the or weight limit of their rear-facing child re- serious injury to a child 12 years or vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back straint. Two types of child restraints can be younger, including a child in a rear- is against the seatback, they should use a used rear-facing: infant carriers and convert- facing child restraint. belt-positioning booster seat. The child and ible child seats. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a belt-positioning booster seat are held in the The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in vehicle with a rear seat. vehicle by the seat belt. the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or Older Children And Child Restraints WARNING! height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible Children who are two years old or who have • Improper installation can lead to failure child seats can be used either rear-facing or outgrown their rear-facing convertible child of an infant or child restraint. It could forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. come loose in a collision. The child child seats often have a higher weight limit in Forward-facing child seats and convertible the rear-facing direction than infant carriers could be badly injured or killed. Follow child seats used in the forward-facing direc- the child restraint manufacturer’s direc- do, so they can be used rear-facing by chil- tion are for children who are over two years tions exactly when installing an infant or dren who have outgrown their infant carrier old or who have outgrown the rear-facing child restraint. but are still less than at least two years old. weight or height limit of their rear-facing • After a child restraint is installed in the Children should remain rear-facing until they convertible child seat. Children should re- vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat reach the highest weight or height allowed by main in a forward-facing child seat with a forward or rearward because it can their convertible child seat. harness for as long as possible, up to the loosen the child restraint attachments. highest weight or height allowed by the child Remove the child restraint before ad- seat. justing the vehicle seat position. When

104 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably WARNING! over the front of the vehicle seat – while WARNING! the vehicle seat has been adjusted, re- the child is still sitting all the way back? Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt install the child restraint. 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s under an arm or behind their back. In a • When your child restraint is not in use, shoulder between their neck and arm? crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt child properly, which may result in serious 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from injury or death. A child must always wear the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the possible, touching the child’s thighs and both the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it not the stomach? seat belt correctly. could strike the occupants or seatbacks 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the and cause serious personal injury. whole trip? Children Too Large For Booster Seats If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a Children who are large enough to wear the booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt long enough to bend over the front of the seat fit periodically and make sure the seat belt when their back is against the seatback, buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use slouching can move the belt out of position. If this simple 5-step test to decide whether the the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone: move the child closer to the center of the 1. Can the child sit all the way back against vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the the back of the vehicle seat? seat belt on the child correctly.

105 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below Child + Child Restraint LATCH – Lower Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether Anchors Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor SAFETY Rear-Facing Up to 65 lbs XX Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Rear-Facing More than 65 lbs X Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs XX Child Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing More than 65 lbs X Child Restraint (29.5 kg)

106 Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child re- LATCH Positions For Installing (LATCH) Restraint System straint anchorage system called LATCH, Child Restraints In This Vehicle which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH- equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the LATCH Positions (Two-Door Models) top tether anchorage to install the child re- — Lower Anchorage Symbol straint. Please see the following table for (2 Anchorages Per Seating more information. Position) LATCH Label — Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

107 SAFETY

LATCH Positions (Four-Door Models) — Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) — Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead attach the child restraint? of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

108 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be forward-facing child restraint. used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages child restraint? if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information. Four Door Only: You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors in the center position. Can a child seat be installed in the center position Yes — Four Door The inner anchorages are 19 inches (484 mm) apart. using the inner LATCH lower anchorages? No — Two Door Do not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center position. Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated Can two child restraints be attached using a No LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a common lower LATCH anchorage? child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows Yes of the front passenger seat? contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. No — Four Door Can the head restraints be removed? Two Door Models — All Yes—TwoDoor

109 Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars There are tether strap anchorages behind that are found at the rear of the seat cushion each rear seating position located on the

SAFETY where it meets the seatback, below the an- back of the seat, near the floor. chorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Tether Strap Anchorages (Four-Door Models)

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible Tether Strap Anchorages strap on each side. Each will have a hook or (Two-Door Models) connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also LATCH Anchors be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. 110 Center Seat LATCH 2. Place the child seat between the lower WARNING! anchorages for that seating position. For Two-Door Models: can then use either the LATCH anchors or some second row seats, you may need to the vehicle’s seat belt for installing child recline the seat and / or raise the head WARNING! seats in the outboard positions. Please restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible can be moved forward and rearward in the This vehicle does not have a center seating Child Restraint System” for typical instal- vehicle, you may wish to move it to its position. Do not use the center lower lation instructions. LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in rear-most position to make room for the the center of the back seat. Always follow the directions of the child re- child seat. You may also move the front straint manufacturer when installing your child seat forward to allow more room for the Four-Door Models: restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be child seat. Do not install child restraints with rigid lower installed as described here. 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of attachments in the center seating position. To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child the child restraint to the lower anchorages Only install this type of child restraint in the in the selected seating position. outboard seating positions. Child restraints Restraint 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach- If the selected seating position has a Switch- connect it to the top tether anchorage. ments can be installed in any rear seating able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat See the section “Installing Child Re- position. belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc- straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” tions below. See the section “Installing Child for directions to attach a tether anchor. WARNING! Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the Never use the same lower anchorage to position has. child restraint rearward and downward attach more than one child restraint. If you into the seat. Remove slack in the straps 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps are installing LATCH-compatible child re- according to the child restraint manufac- straints next to each other, you must use and on the tether strap of the child seat so turer’s instructions. the seat belt for the center position. You that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 111 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the WARNING! WARNING! child seat at the belt path. It should not • Improper installation of a child restraint • Improper installation or failure to prop- move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any to the LATCH anchorages can lead to erly secure a child restraint can lead to SAFETY direction. failure of the restraint. The child could failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the be badly injured or killed. How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR child restraint manufacturer’s directions • Follow the child restraint manufactur- (ALR) Seat Belt: exactly when installing an infant or child er’s directions exactly when installing an When using the LATCH attaching system to restraint. infant or child restraint. install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat • Child restraint anchorages are designed The seat belts in the passenger seating posi- belts that are not being used by other occu- to withstand only those loads imposed tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto- pants or being used to secure child restraints. by correctly-fitted child restraints. Un- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is de- An unused belt could injure a child if they der no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or signed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt for attaching other items or equipment tight around the child restraint so that it is retractor. Before installing a child restraint to the vehicle. not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt retractor can be “switched” into a locked behind the child restraint and out of the Installing Child Restraints Using mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter- The Vehicle Seat Belt retractor and then letting the webbing retract feres with the child restraint installation, back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR instead of buckling it behind the child re- Child restraint systems are designed to be will make a clicking noise while the webbing straint, route the seat belt through the child secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. “Automatic Locking Mode” description in lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” that they should not play with them. for additional information on ALR.

112 Please see the table below and the following Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing sections for more information. Child Restraints In This Vehicle

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations (Four-Door Models) ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Retractor Locations (Two-Door Models) Top Tether Anchorage Symbol ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s weight + Always use the tether anchor when using weight of the child restraint) for using the the seat belt to install a forward facing Weight limit of the Child Restraint Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a child restraint, up to the recommended forward facing child restraint? weight limit of the child restraint.

113 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts Contact between the front passenger seat and Can the rear-facing child restraint touch Yes the child restraint is allowed, if the child the back of the front passenger seat? restraint manufacturer also allows contact. SAFETY No — Four Door Can the head restraints be removed? All — Two Door Yes — Two Door Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating the seat belt against the belt path of the No position with an ALR retractor. child restraint?

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch- 1. Place the child seat in the center of the 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): seating position. For some second row portion tight against the child seat. seats, you may need to recline the seat Child restraint systems are designed to be 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the and/or raise the head restraint to get a secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the shoulder part of the belt until you have better fit. If the rear seat can be moved lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the forward and rearward in the vehicle, you retractor. Then, allow the webbing to re- may wish to move it to its rear-most posi- WARNING! tract back into the retractor. As the web- tion to make room for the child seat. You bing retracts, you will hear a clicking may also move the front seat forward to • Improper installation or failure to prop- sound. This means the seat belt is now in allow more room for the child seat. erly secure a child restraint can lead to the Automatic Locking mode. failure of the restraint. The child could 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. be badly injured or killed. the retractor to pass it through the belt If it is locked, you should not be able to • Follow the child restraint manufactur- path of the child restraint. Do not twist the er’s directions exactly when installing an belt webbing in the belt path. pull out any webbing. If the retractor is infant or child restraint. not locked, repeat step 5. 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 114 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to Installing Child Restraints Using The 1. Look behind the seating position where tighten the lap portion around the child Top Tether Anchorage you plan to install the child restraint to restraint while you push the child restraint find the tether anchorage. You may need rearward and downward into the vehicle WARNING! to move the seat forward to provide better seat. access to the tether anchorage. If there is Do not attach a tether strap for a rear- no top tether anchorage for that seating 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap facing car seat to any location in front of and the seating position has a top tether position, move the child restraint to an- the car seat, including the seat frame or a other position in the vehicle if one is anchorage, connect the tether strap to the tether anchorage. Only attach the tether available. anchorage and tighten the tether strap. strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether See the section “Installing Child Re- anchorage that is approved for that seating 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” position, located behind the top of the direct path for the strap between the an- for directions to attach a tether anchor. vehicle seat. See the section “Lower An- chor and the child seat. If your vehicle is chors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) 9. Test that the child restraint is installed equipped with adjustable rear head re- Restraint System” for the location of ap- straints, raise the head restraint, and tightly by pulling back and forth on the proved tether anchorages in your vehicle. child seat at the belt path. It should not where possible, route the tether strap un- move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any der the head restraint and between the direction. two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so the outboard side of the head restraint. check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

115 4. Remove slack in the tether strap accord- SAFETY TIPS ing to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Transporting Passengers SAFETY WARNING! NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the WARNING! anchorage position directly behind the • Do not leave children or animals inside child seat to secure a child restraint top parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models) tether strap. heat build-up may cause serious injury • If your vehicle is equipped with a split or death. rear seat, make sure the tether strap • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a does not slip into the opening between cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. the seatbacks as you remove slack in the In a collision, people riding in these strap. areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Transporting Pets • Do not allow people to ride in any area of Air Bags deploying in the front seat could your vehicle that is not equipped with harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be seats and seat belts. thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a Tether Strap Mounting (Four-Door Models) passenger during panic braking or in a colli- seat and using a seat belt properly. sion. 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in restraint to the top tether anchorage as pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured shown in the diagram. by seat belts. 116 Exhaust Gas The best protection against carbon monoxide Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced entry into the vehicle body is a properly main- after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies WARNING! tained engine exhaust system. must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web- Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They con- bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can tain carbon monoxide (CO), which is col- seat belt or retractor condition, replace the be detected inside the vehicle, or when the orless and odorless. Breathing it can make seat belt. underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, you unconscious and can eventually poi- son you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow have a competent mechanic inspect the com- Air Bag Warning Light these safety tips: plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or The Air Bag warning light will turn on for • Do not run the engine in a closed garage four to eight seconds as a bulb check when or in confined areas any longer than mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. needed to move your vehicle in or out of If the light is either not on during starting, the area. seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each stays on, or turns on while driving, have the • If you are required to drive with the system inspected at an authorized dealer as trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. soon as possible. This light will illuminate that all windows are closed and the cli- with a single chime when a fault with the Air mate control BLOWER switch is set at Safety Checks YouShould Make Inside Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will high speed. DO NOT use the recircula- The Vehicle stay on until the fault is removed. If the light tion mode. comes on intermittently or remains on while • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle driving, have an authorized dealer service the with the engine running, adjust your Seat Belts vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Re- heating or cooling controls to force out- Inspect the seat belt system periodically, straint Systems” in “Safety” for further infor- side air into the vehicle. Set the blower mation. at high speed. checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

117 Defroster WARNING! WARNING! Check operation by selecting the defrost • ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on mode and place the blower control on high An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat the driver’s side floor area. To check for SAFETY speed. You should be able to feel the air interference, with the vehicle properly directed against the windshield. See your fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or parked with the engine off, fully depress authorized dealer for service if your defroster the accelerator, the brake, and the is inoperable. clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or clutch pedal (if present) to check for Floor Mat Safety Information DEATH: interference. If your floor mat interferes • ALWAYS securely attach your floor with the operation of any pedal, or is not Always use floor mats designed to fit your mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO secure to the floor, remove the floor mat vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not NOT install your floor mat upside down from the vehicle and place the floor mat interfere with the operation of the pedal as- or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to in your trunk. semblies. Only use a floor mat that is se- confirm mat is secured using the floor • ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat curely attached using the floor mat fasteners mat fasteners on a regular basis. on the passenger’s side floor area. so it cannot slip out of position and interfere • ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING • ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall with the pedal assemblies or impair safe FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE or slide into the driver’s side floor area operation of your vehicle in other ways. before installing any other floor mat. when the vehicle is moving. Objects can NEVER install or stack an additional become trapped under accelerator, floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. brake, or clutch pedals and could cause • ONLY install floor mats designed to fit a loss of vehicle control. your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat • NEVER place any objects under the floor that cannot be properly attached and mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These ob- secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat jects could change the position of the needs to be replaced, only use a FCA floor mat and may cause interference approved floor mat for the specific with the accelerator, brake, or clutch make, model, and year of your vehicle. pedals.

118 Door Latches WARNING! Periodic Safety Checks YouShould Make Outside The Vehicle • If the vehicle carpet has been removed Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. and re-installed, always properly attach Tires carpet to the floor and check the floor Examine tires for excessive tread wear and Fluid Leaks mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, carpet. Fully depress each pedal to Check area under vehicle after overnight nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the check for interference with the accelera- parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts tor, brake, or clutch pedals then re- leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, install the floor mats. cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The • It is recommended to only use mild soap tightness. Check the tires (including spare) cause should be located and corrected imme- and water to clean your floor mats. After for proper cold inflation pressure. diately. cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is se- Lights cured to your vehicle using the floor mat Have someone observe the operation of brake fasteners by lightly pulling mat. lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

119 120 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING THE ENGINE ...... 122 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — SPEED CONTROL...... 137 Manual Transmission — IFEQUIPPED...... 129 To Activate ...... 138 If Equipped ...... 122 Key Ignition Park Interlock ...... 130 To Set A Desired Speed ...... 138 Automatic Transmission — Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock To Vary The Speed Setting...... 138 If Equipped ...... 122 System ...... 130 To Accelerate For Passing ...... 139 Normal Starting ...... 122 Five-Speed Automatic Transmission — To Resume Speed ...... 139 Extreme Cold Weather If Equipped...... 130 To Deactivate ...... 139 (Below –22°F Or −30°C) ...... 122 Autostick ...... 131 REFUELING THE VEHICLE .....140 If Engine Fails To Start ...... 122 FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION Fuel Filler Cap ...... 140 After Starting...... 123 (COMMAND-TRAC I Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ...... 141 ENGINE BREAK-IN OR ROCK-TRAC) ...... 132 TRAILER TOWING ...... 141 RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 124 Operating Instructions/Precautions . . .132 Trailer Towing Weights PARKING BRAKE ...... 124 Shift Positions ...... 133 (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . .141 Shifting Procedures ...... 134 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — RECREATIONAL TOWING Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped . . .135 IFEQUIPPED...... 126 (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . .144 Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Shifting ...... 126 Towing This Vehicle Behind Rubicon Models ...... 135 Another Vehicle ...... 144 Downshifting ...... 127 Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — Recreational Towing — Reverse Shifting ...... 128 If Equipped ...... 136 Four-Wheel Drive Models ...... 145

121 STARTING THE ENGINE Manual Transmission — If Equipped Normal Starting Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, Apply the parking brake, place the gear se- NOTE: adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and lector in NEUTRAL, and press the clutch Normal starting of either a cold or a warm fasten your seat belts. pedal before starting the vehicle. This vehicle engine is obtained without pumping or press- is equipped with a clutch interlocking igni- ing the accelerator pedal. tion system. It will not start unless the clutch WARNING! pedal is pressed to the floor. Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts. If the • When exiting the vehicle, always remove Four-Wheel Drive Models Only engine fails to start within 10 seconds, cycle the key fob from the ignition and lock the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position, your vehicle. In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Nor- • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, mal Starting” procedure. or with access to an unlocked vehicle. to the floor. This feature enhances off-road • Allowing children to be in a vehicle un- performance by allowing the vehicle to start Extreme Cold Weather attended is dangerous for a number of when in 4L without having to press the clutch

STARTING AND OPERATING (Below –22°F Or −30°C) reasons. A child or others could be seri- pedal. The “4WD Indicator Light” will illumi- ously or fatally injured. Children should nate when the transfer case has been shifted To ensure reliable starting at these tempera- be warned not to touch the parking into this mode. tures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your au- brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Automatic Transmission — If Equipped • Do not leave the key fob in or near the thorized dealer) is recommended. vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil- Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the If Engine Fails ToStart dren. A child could operate power win- PARK position (vehicle can also be started in dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. NEUTRAL). Apply the brake before shifting • Do not leave children or animals inside to any driving range. WARNING! parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior • Never pour fuel or other flammable liq- heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. uid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle.

122 Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the With Tip Start — Automatic Transmission Only WARNING! floor and hold it there while cranking the If the engine fails to start after you have This could result in flash fire causing engine. This should clear any excess fuel in followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme serious personal injury. case the engine is flooded. Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. • Do not attempt to push or tow your To clear any excess fuel, push the accelerator vehicle to get it started. Vehicles CAUTION! pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. equipped with an automatic transmis- Then, turn the ignition switch to the START sion cannot be started this way. Un- To prevent damage to the starter, do not position and release it as soon as the starter burned fuel could enter the catalytic crank the engine for more than 15 seconds engages. The starter motor will disengage converter and once the engine has at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before automatically in 10 seconds. Once this oc- started, ignite and damage the converter trying again. curs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the and vehicle. • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, If the engine has been flooded, it may start to ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait booster cables may be used to obtain a run, but not have enough power to continue 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal start from a booster battery or the battery running when the key is released. If this Starting” procedure. in another vehicle. This type of start can occurs, continue cranking with the accelera- be dangerous if done improperly. Refer tor pedal pushed all the way to the floor. CAUTION! to “Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Release the accelerator pedal and the key To prevent damage to the starter, wait Case Of Emergency” for further informa- once the engine is running smoothly. 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. tion. If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15-second periods of cranking with the After Starting Without Tip Start — Manual Transmission Only accelerator pedal held to the floor, repeat the If the engine fails to start after you have “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold The idle speed is controlled automatically, followed the “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Weather” procedures. and it will decrease as the engine warms up. Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded.

123 ENGINE BREAK-IN CAUTION! RECOMMENDATIONS Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight A long break-in period is not required for the Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) result. in your vehicle. NOTE: Drive moderately during the first 300 miles A new engine may consume some oil during (500 km). After the initial 60 miles its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or operation. This should be considered a nor- 90 km/h) are desirable. mal part of the break-in and not interpreted While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration as a problem. within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle PARKING BRAKE STARTING AND OPERATING Parking Brake Lever acceleration in low gear can be detrimental Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the and should be avoided. parking brake is fully applied. Also, be cer- When the parking brake is applied with the The engine oil installed in the engine at the tain to leave an automatic transmission in ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning factory is a high-quality energy conserving PARK, or manual transmission in REVERSE Light” in the instrument cluster will illumi- type lubricant. Oil changes should be consis- or FIRST gear. nate. tent with anticipated climate conditions un- The parking brake lever is located in the der which vehicle operations will occur. For center console. To apply the parking brake, the recommended viscosity and quality pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To grades, refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servic- release the parking brake, pull the lever up ing And Maintenance”. slightly, push the center button, then lower the lever completely.

124 NOTE: WARNING! WARNING! • When the parking brake is applied and the • Be sure the parking brake is fully disen- automatic transmission is placed in gear, • Never use the PARK position on an au- gaged before driving; failure to do so can the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If tomatic transmission as a substitute for lead to brake failure and a collision. the parking brake. Always apply the vehicle speed is detected, a chime will • Always fully apply the parking brake parking brake fully when parked to guard sound to alert the driver. Fully release the when leaving your vehicle or it may roll against vehicle movement and possible parking brake before attempting to move and cause damage or injury. Also, be injury or damage. the vehicle. certain to leave an automatic transmis- • When exiting the vehicle, always remove sion in PARK, a manual transmission in • This light only shows that the parking brake the key fob from the ignition and lock REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so is applied. It does not show the degree of your vehicle. brake application. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. When parking on a hill, it is important to turn or with access to an unlocked vehicle. the front wheels toward the curb on a down- Allowing children to be in a vehicle un- hill grade and away from the curb on an uphill attended is dangerous for a number of CAUTION! reasons. A child or others could be seri- grade. For vehicles equipped with an auto- ously or fatally injured. Children should If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on matic transmission, apply the parking brake be warned not to touch the parking with the parking brake released, a brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. system malfunction is indicated. Have the otherwise the load on the transmission lock- • Do not leave the key fob in or near the brake system serviced by an authorized ing mechanism may make it difficult to move vehicle, or in a location accessible to dealer immediately. the gear selector out of PARK. The parking children. A child could operate power brake should always be applied whenever the windows, other controls, or move the driver is not in the vehicle. vehicle.

125 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — NOTE: A certain amount of noise from the transmis- IF EQUIPPED sion is normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL WARNING! with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when driv- You or others could be injured if you leave ing. The noise may also be more noticeable the vehicle unattended without having the when the transmission is warm. This noise is parking brake fully applied. The parking normal and is not an indication of a problem brake should always be applied when the with your clutch or transmission. driver is not in the vehicle, especially on Shift Pattern an incline. Shifting CAUTION! Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting

STARTING AND OPERATING gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly Never drive with your foot resting on the press the accelerator pedal. clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal par- You should always use first gear when starting tially engaged, as this will cause abnormal from a standing position. wear on the clutch.

NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is normal.

126 Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a To utilize your manual transmission effi- trailer these recommended up-shift speeds ciently for both fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in may not apply. recommended shift speed chart. Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H) Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6 Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90) 3.6L Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)

NOTE: Downshifting Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are CAUTION! for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when • Skipping gears and downshifting into would be significantly less. lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can driving down steep hills. In addition, down- damage the engine and clutch systems, shifting at the right time provides better ac- Any attempt to shift into lower gear with celeration when you desire to resume speed. clutch pedal depressed may result dam- Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to age to the clutch system. Shifting into avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch. lower gear and releasing the clutch may result in engine damage. WARNING! • When descending a hill, be very careful Do not downshift for additional engine to downshift one gear at a time to pre- braking on a slippery surface. The drive vent overspeeding the engine which can wheels could lose their grip, and the ve- cause engine damage, and/or clutch hicle could skid. damage, even if the clutch pedal is

127 Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds CAUTION! pressed. If transfer case is in low range CAUTION! the vehicle speeds to cause engine and clutch damage are significantly lower. Failure to follow the maximum recom- • Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause mended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and/or damage the engine damage and/or damage the the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. pressed. • Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal depressed could result in clutch damage.

STARTING AND OPERATING Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H) Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1 Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)

NOTE: Reverse Shifting Beginning from the NEUTRAL position, move Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are the gear selector in one quick, smooth motion To shift into REVERSE, bring the vehicle to a for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L straight across and into the REVERSE area complete stop. Press the clutch and pause would be significantly less. (the driver will feel a firm “click” as the briefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating. shifter passes the “knock-over”). Complete the shift by pulling the gear selector into REVERSE.

128 The “knock-over” provides a resistance to the NOTE: driver from accidentally entering the RE- You must press and hold the brake pedal WARNING! VERSE shift area and warns the driver that while shifting out of PARK. idling normally and your foot is firmly they are about to shift the transmission into pressing the brake pedal. REVERSE. Due to this feature, a slow shift to WARNING! • Unintended movement of a vehicle REVERSE can be perceived as a high shift could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never effort. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always ap- exit a vehicle while the engine is run- AUTOMATIC ply the parking brake fully when exiting ning. Before exiting a vehicle always the vehicle to guard against vehicle come to a complete stop, then apply the TRANSMISSION — movement and possible injury or dam- parking brake, shift the transmission IF EQUIPPED age. into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and • Your vehicle could move and injure you remove the ignition key. Once the key is and others if it is not in PARK. Check by removed, the transmission is locked in CAUTION! trying to move the gear selector out of PARK, securing the vehicle against un- Damage to the transmission may occur if PARK with the brake pedal released. wanted movement. the following precautions are not ob- Make sure the transmission is in PARK • When exiting the vehicle, always remove served: before exiting the vehicle. the ignition key from the vehicle and • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or lock the vehicle. only after the vehicle has come to a NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, complete stop. than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle un- NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is could accelerate quickly forward or in attended is dangerous for a number of above idle speed. reverse. You could lose control of the reasons. A child or others could be seri- • Before shifting into any gear, make sure vehicle and hit someone or something. ously or fatally injured. Children should your foot is firmly pressing the brake Only shift into gear when the engine is be warned not to touch the parking pedal.

129 The transmission electronics are self- WARNING! Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a brake, brake pedal or the transmission new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Trans- gear selector. a normal condition, and precision shifts will mission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that • Do not leave the ignition key in or near develop within a few hundred miles (kilome- holds the transmission gear selector in PARK the vehicle (or in a location accessible to ters). children). A child could operate power unless the brakes are applied. To shift the windows, other controls, or move the transmission out of PARK, the ignition must Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE vehicle. be in the ON/RUN position (engine running when the accelerator pedal is released and or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your Key Ignition Park Interlock foot on the brake pedal when shifting be- Five-Speed Automatic Transmission — tween these gears. This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition If Equipped Park Interlock which requires the transmis- The transmission gear selector has only The transmission gear position display (lo- sion to be in PARK before the ignition can be PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE

STARTING AND OPERATING cated in the instrument cluster) indicates the turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal) posi- shift positions. Manual shifts can be made transmission gear range. You must press the tion. The key can only be removed from the brake pedal to move the gear selector out of using the Autostick shift control. Moving the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift In- gear selector to the left or right (-/+) while in position, and once removed the transmission terlock System” in this section). To drive, the DRIVE position will manually select the is locked in PARK. move the gear selector from PARK or NEU- transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. NOTE: TRAL to the DRIVE position. Refer to “AutoStick” in this section for fur- If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap The electronically-controlled transmission ther information. the key in the ignition to warn you that this adapts its shift schedule based on driver safety feature is inoperable. The engine can inputs, along with environmental and road be started and stopped but the key cannot be conditions. removed until you obtain service.

130 This system can also provide you with more • The transmission will automatically upshift control during passing, city driving, cold slip- when necessary to prevent engine over- pery conditions, mountain driving, trailer speed. towing, and many other situations. • Heavily pressing the accelerator pedal will Operation generate an automatic downshift (for improved acceleration) when reasonable. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE posi- • The transmission will automatically down- tion, the transmission will operate automati- shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine cally, shifting between the five available lugging) and will display the current gear. gears. To engage AutoStick, simply tap the gear selector to the right or left (+/-) while in • The transmission will automatically down- the DRIVE position. Tapping (-) to enter shift to first gear when coming to a stop. AutoStick mode will downshift the transmis- After a stop, the driver should manually sion to the next lower gear, while using (+) to upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle Gear Selector enter AutoStick mode will retain the current is accelerated. Autostick gear. When AutoStick is active, the current • You can start out, from a stop, in first or transmission gear is displayed in the instru- second gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission ment cluster. allow starting in second gear. Starting out feature providing manual shift control, giving in second gear can be helpful in snowy or In AutoStick mode, the transmission will you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick icy conditions. allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi- shift up or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, unless an engine lugging • The system will ignore attempts to upshift nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, at too low of a vehicle speed. and improve overall vehicle performance. or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear until another • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick upshift or downshift is chosen, except as is engaged. described below. • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled. 131 NOTE: FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE When the transfer case is in the 4L (Low) range, the transmission will shift automati- OPERATION (COMMAND- cally (but no higher than the displayed gear). TRAC I OR ROCK-TRAC) To disengage AutoStick mode, hold the gear selector to the right (+) until "D" is once again WARNING! displayed in the instrument cluster. You can Failure to engage a transfer case position shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any completely can cause transfer case dam- time without taking your foot off the accel- age or loss of power and vehicle control. erator pedal. You could have a collision. Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully WARNING! engaged. Do not downshift for additional engine Operating Instructions/Precautions STARTING AND OPERATING Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector braking on a slippery surface. The drive The transfer case provides four mode posi- wheels could lose their grip and the ve- The transfer case is intended to be driven in tions: hicle could skid, causing a collision or the 2H position for normal street and highway personal injury. • 2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range) conditions, such as hard-surfaced roads. • 4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range) In the event that additional traction is re- • N (Neutral) quired, the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear drive- • 4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range) shafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L 132 positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause When operating your vehicle in 4L, the en- Shift Positions increased tire wear and damage to the drive- gine speed will be approximately three times line components. Refer to “Shifting Proce- (four times for Rubicon models) that of the For additional information on the appropriate dures” in this section for further information 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed. use of each 4WD system mode position, see on shifting into 4H or 4L. Take care not to overspeed the engine. the information below: The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles 2H Position instrument cluster) alerts the driver that the depends on tires of equal size, type, and vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front circumference on each wheel. Any difference and rear driveshafts are locked together. The will adversely affect shifting and cause dam- light will illuminate when the transfer case is age to the transfer case. shifted into the 4H position. Because four-wheel drive provides improved NOTE: traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe Do not attempt to shift when only the front or turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is than road conditions permit. not equipped with a synchronizer, and the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for a shift to take place. Shifting while the front or rear wheels are spinning at different speeds can cause damage to the transfer case.

Four-Wheel Drive Shift Pattern

This range is used for normal street and highway driving on hard-surfaced roads.

133 4H Position NOTE: WARNING! When in 4L, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” This range locks the front and rear driveshafts driveshafts from the powertrain, and will will display in the instrument cluster. together, forcing the front and rear wheels to allow the vehicle to roll, even if the auto- rotate at the same speed. This range (4H) matic transmission is in PARK (or manual Shifting Procedures provides additional traction for loose, slip- transmission is in gear). The parking brake pery road surfaces and should not be used on should always be applied when the driver 2H to 4H or 4H to 2H dry pavement. is not in the vehicle. Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the 4L Position instrument cluster) will illuminate when the the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will transfer case is shifted into the 4H position. This range locks the front and rear driveshafts engage/disengage faster if you momentarily together, forcing the front and rear wheels to release the accelerator pedal after complet- N (Neutral) Position rotate at the same speed. This range (4L) ing the shift. Apply a constant force when This range disengages the front and rear provides additional traction and maximum shifting the transfer case lever. STARTING AND OPERATING driveshafts from the powertrain. It is to be pulling power for loose, slippery road sur- 4H to 4L or 4L to 4H used for flat towing behind another vehicle. faces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to And Operating” for further information. CAUTION! 5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a WARNING! Exceeding 25 mph (40 km/h) while the manual transmission. While the vehicle is transfer case is engaged in 4L may result coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the You or others could be injured or killed if in an engine overspeed condition and en- transfer case lever firmly to the desired posi- you leave the vehicle unattended with the gine damage. transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position tion. Do not pause with the transfer case in N without first fully engaging the parking The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the (Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) instrument cluster) will illuminate when the the automatic transmission into DRIVE or position disengages both the front and rear transfer case is shifted into the 4L position. release the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. 134 NOTE: Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped; however, diffi- The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the culty may occur due to the mating teeth not driving force to both rear wheels and reduces instrument panel (to the left of the steering being properly aligned. Several attempts may wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at column). be required for clutch teeth alignment and one driving wheel. If traction differs between shift completion to occur. The preferred the two rear wheels, the differential auto- method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to matically proportions the usable torque by 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to providing more torque to the wheel that has engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle mov- traction. ing faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a WARNING! slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction. Failure to engage a transfer case position completely can cause transfer case dam- WARNING! age or loss of power and vehicle control. You could have a collision. Do not drive the On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip vehicle unless the transfer case is fully differential, never run the engine with one engaged. rear wheel off the ground. The vehicle may Axle Lock Switch drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control of This feature will only activate when the fol- your vehicle. lowing conditions are met: • Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range. • Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.

135 To activate the system, push the bottom of Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the the AXLE LOCK switch once to lock the rear If Equipped system. Push the switch again to deactivate axle only (the “Rear Axle Lock Indicator the system. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” Light” will illuminate), push the bottom of Your vehicle may be equipped with an elec- (located in the instrument cluster) will illu- the switch again to lock the front axle (the tronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This minate when the bar is disconnected. The “Front Axle Lock Indicator Light” will illumi- system allows greater front suspension travel “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash during nate). When the rear axle is locked, pushing in off-road situations. activation transition, or when activation con- the bottom of switch again will lock or unlock ditions are not met. The stabilizer/sway bar This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR the front axle. should remain in on-road mode during nor- switch located on the instrument panel (to mal driving conditions. NOTE: the left of the steering column). The indicator lights will flash until the axles WARNING! are fully locked or unlocked. Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and To unlock the axles, push the top of the AXLE drive on hardsurfaced roads or at speeds

STARTING AND OPERATING LOCK switch. above 18 mph (29 km/h); you may lose Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken control of the vehicle, which could result out of 4L (Low) range, or the ignition switch is in serious injury. The front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and is neces- turned to the OFF position. sary for maintaining control of the vehicle. The system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a flashing or solid “Sway Bar Indicator Light.” Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the Sway Bar Switch system will once again attempt to return to off-road mode.

136 To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to SPEED CONTROL either 4H or 4L and push the SWAY BAR WARNING! When engaged, the Speed Control takes over switch to obtain the off-road position. Refer If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this sec- on-road mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator accelerator operations at speeds greater than tion for further information. The “Sway Bar Light” will flash in the instrument cluster 25 mph (40 km/h). Indicator Light” will flash until the stabilizer/ and vehicle stability is greatly reduced. Do The Speed Control buttons are located on the sway bar has been fully disconnected. not attempt to drive the vehicle over right side of the steering wheel. 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than NOTE: 18 mph (29 km/ h) may cause loss of The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked control of the vehicle, which could result due to left and right suspension height differ- in serious injury. Contact your local autho- ences. This condition is due to driving sur- rized dealer for assistance. face differences or vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/ reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned. This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side. To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR switch again.

Speed Control Buttons 1 — Push CANCEL 2 — Push ON/OFF 3 — Push RES (+)/Accel 4 — Push SET (-) /Decel

137 NOTE: The driver’s preferred units can be selected In order to ensure proper operation, the WARNING! through the instrument panel settings if Speed Control System has been designed to Leaving the Speed Control system on when equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your shut down if multiple Speed Control func- not in use is dangerous. You could acci- Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual for tions are operated at the same time. If this dentally set the system or cause it to go more information. The speed increment occurs, the Speed Control System can be faster than you want. You could lose con- shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit reactivated by pushing the Speed Control trol and have an accident. Always leave the of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): ON/OFF button and resetting the desired ve- system off when you are not using it. U.S. Speed (mph) hicle set speed. ToSet A Desired Speed • Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each WARNING! Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle subsequent tap of the button results in an has reached the desired speed, push the SET Speed Control can be dangerous where the increase of 1 mph. system cannot maintain a constant speed. (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the se- • If the button is continually pushed, the set STARTING AND OPERATING Your vehicle could go too fast for the con- speed will continue to increase until the ditions, and you could lose control and lected speed. button is released, then the new set speed have an accident. Do not use Speed Con- NOTE: trol in heavy traffic or on roads that are will be established. The vehicle should be traveling at a steady winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. speed and on level ground before pushing the Metric Speed (km/h) ToActivate SET (-) button. • Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indica- ToVary The Speed Setting subsequent tap of the button results in an tor Light in the instrument cluster display will To Increase Speed increase of 1 km/h. illuminate. To turn the system off, push the • If the button is continually pushed, the set When the Speed Control is set, you can in- ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise speed will continue to increase until the Indicator Light will turn off. The system crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. button is released, then the new set speed should be turned off when not in use. will be established. 138 To Decrease Speed • If the button is continually pushed, the set Using Speed Control On Hills speed will continue to decrease until the When the Speed Control is set, you can de- The transmission may downshift on hills to button is released, then the new set speed crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. maintain the vehicle set speed. will be established. The driver’s preferred units can be selected NOTE: through the instrument panel settings if ToAccelerate For Passing The Speed Control system maintains speed equipped. Refer to “Getting To Know Your Press the accelerator as you would normally. up and down hills. A slight speed change on Instrument Panel” in the Owner’s Manual for When the pedal is released, the vehicle will moderate hills is normal. more information. The speed increment return to the set speed. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit may occur so it may be preferable to drive ToResume Speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): without Speed Control. U.S. Speed (mph) To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be WARNING! • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each Speed Control can be dangerous where the subsequent tap of the button results in a ToDeactivate system cannot maintain a constant speed. decrease of 1 mph. Your vehicle could go too fast for the con- A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the ditions, and you could lose control and • If the button is continually pushed, the set CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure have an accident. Do not use Speed Con- speed will continue to decrease until the while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the trol in heavy traffic or on roads that are button is released, then the new set speed Speed Control without erasing the set speed winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. will be established. from memory. Metric Speed (km/h) Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result ignition switch OFF erases the set speed from in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each memory. subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. 139 REFUELING THE VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION!

Fuel Filler Cap • Never have any smoking materials lit in • Damage to the fuel system or emission The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's or near the vehicle when the gas cap is control system could result from using side of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost removed or the tank is being filled. an improper fuel filler cap. A poorly • Never add fuel when the engine is run- fitting cap could let impurities into the or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is ning. This is in violation of most state fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting after- the correct one for this vehicle. and federal fire regulations and may market cap can cause the “Malfunction cause the MIL to turn on. Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped to fuel vapors escaping from the system. into a portable container that is inside of • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do a vehicle. You could be burned. Always not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. place gas containers on the ground while filling. NOTE:

STARTING AND OPERATING • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. • Tighten the fuel filler cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened. • If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the cap Fuel Filler Cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

140 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Push the odometer reset After fuel has been added, the vehicle diag- button to turn the message off. If the problem nostic system can determine if the fuel filler persists, the message will appear the next cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or time the vehicle is started. This might indi- damaged. If the system detects a malfunc- cate a damaged cap. If the problem is de- tion, the “gASCAP” message will display in tected twice in a row, the system will turn on the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the until a "clicking" sound is heard. MIL off. TRAILER TOWING

Trailer TowingWeights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) Engine/ GCWR (Gross Max. GTW Max. Trailer Tongue Axle Model Frontal Area Transmission Combined Wt. Rating) (Gross Trailer Wt.) Wt. (See Note) Two–Door Sport 25 sq ft 2,000 lbs 3.6L/Manual 3.21 6,900 lbs (3 130 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) Model (4WD) (2.32 sq m) (907 kg) Two–Door Sport 25 sq ft 3,500 lbs 3.6L/Manual 3.73 8,400 lbs (3 810 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) Model (4WD) (2.32 sq m) (1 587 kg) Two–Door Sport 25 sq ft 2,000 lbs 3.6L/Automatic 3.21 6,900 lbs (3 130 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) Model (4WD) (2.32 sq m) (907 kg) Two–Door Sport 25 sq ft 3,500 lbs 3.6L/Automatic 3.73 8,400 lbs (3 810 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) Model (4WD) (2.32 sq m) (1 587 kg) Two–Door Sahara 25 sq ft 2,000 lbs 3.6L/Manual 3.21 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) Model (4WD) (2.32 sq m) (907 kg)

141 Engine/ GCWR (Gross Max. GTW Max. Trailer Tongue Axle Model Frontal Area Transmission Combined Wt. Rating) (Gross Trailer Wt.) Wt. (See Note) Two–Door Sahara 25 sq ft 3,500 lbs 3.6L/Manual 3.73 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) Model (4WD) (2.32 sq m) (1 587 kg) Two–Door Sahara 25 sq ft 2,000 lbs 3.6L/Automatic 3.21 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) Model (4WD) (2.32 sq m) (907 kg) Two–Door Sahara 25 sq ft 3,500 lbs 3.6L/Automatic 3.73 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) Model (4WD) (2.32 sq m) (1 587 kg) Two–Door Rubicon 25 sq ft 3,500 lbs 3.6L/Manual 4.10 8,600 lbs (3 900 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) Model (4WD) (2.32 sq m) (1 587 kg) Two–Door Rubicon 25 sq ft 3,500 lbs 3.6L/Automatic 3.73 8,600 lbs (3 900 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) Model (4WD) (2.32 sq m) (1 587 kg) Four–Door Sport 32 sq ft 2,000 lbs 3.6L/Manual 3.21 7,400 lbs (3 357 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)

STARTING AND OPERATING Model (4WD) (2.97 sq m) (907 kg) Four–Door Sport 32 sq ft 3,500 lbs 3.6L/Manual 3.73 8,900 lbs (4 037 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) Model (4WD) (2.97 sq m) (1 587 kg) Four–Door Sport 32 sq ft 2,000 lbs 3.6L/Automatic 3.21 7,400 lbs (3 357 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) Model (4WD) (2.97 sq m) (907 kg) Four–Door Sport 32 sq ft 3,500 lbs 3.6L/Automatic 3.73 8,900 lbs (4 037 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) Model (4WD) (2.97 sq m) (1 587 kg) Four–Door Sahara 32 sq ft 2,000 lbs 3.6L/Manual 3.21 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) Model (4WD) (2.97 sq m) (907 kg) Four–Door Sahara 32 sq ft 3,500 lbs 3.6L/Manual 3.73 9,000 lbs (4 082 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) Model (4WD) (2.97 sq m) (1 587 kg)

142 Engine/ GCWR (Gross Max. GTW Max. Trailer Tongue Axle Model Frontal Area Transmission Combined Wt. Rating) (Gross Trailer Wt.) Wt. (See Note) Four–Door Sahara 32 sq ft 2,000 lbs 3.6L/Automatic 3.21 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) Model (4WD) (2.97 sq m) (907 kg) Four–Door Sahara 32 sq ft 3,500 lbs 3.6L/Automatic 3.73 9,000 lbs (4 082 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) Model (4WD) (2.97 sq m) (1 587 kg) Four–Door Rubicon 32 sq ft 3,500 lbs 3.6L/Manual 4.10 9,200 lbs (4 173 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) Model (4WD) (2.97 sq m) (1 587 kg) Four–Door Rubicon 32 sq ft 3,500 lbs 3.6L/Automatic 3.73 9,200 lbs (4 173 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg) Model (4WD) (2.97 sq m) (1 587 kg) Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo (ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servic- ing And Maintenance” in the Owner’s information for further details.

143 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) TowingThis Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models See Instructions • Automatic transmission in PARK. Flat Tow NONE • Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL [N]). • Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N). • Tow in forward direction. Front NOT ALLOWED Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK

NOTE: • When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional STARTING AND OPERATING details. • For RHD models, refer to the Postal Supplement for Recreational Towing instructions.

144 Recreational Towing— CAUTION! WARNING! Four-Wheel Drive Models • Before recreational towing, perform the brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) NOTE: procedure outlined under “Shifting Into position disengages both the front and rear The transfer case must be shifted into NEU- NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the driveshafts from the powertrain, and will TRAL (N), automatic transmission must be in transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). allow the vehicle to roll, even if the auto- PARK, and manual transmission must be in Otherwise, internal damage will result. matic transmission is in PARK (or manual gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational • Towing this vehicle in violation of the transmission is in gear). The parking brake should always be applied when the driver towing. above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case dam- is not in the vehicle. CAUTION! age. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Lim- CAUTION! • DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. ited Warranty. Towing with only one set of wheels on the • Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on It is necessary to follow these steps to be ground (front or rear) will cause severe tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper certain that the transfer case is fully in transmission and/or transfer case dam- face bar will be damaged. NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing age. Tow with all four wheels either ON to prevent damage to internal parts. the ground, or OFF the ground (using a Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on vehicle trailer). Use the following procedure to prepare your level ground. • Tow only in the forward direction. Towing vehicle for recreational towing. this vehicle backwards can cause severe 2. Press and hold the brake pedal. damage to the transfer case. 3. Shift the automatic transmission into • Automatic transmissions must be WARNING! NEUTRAL or depress the clutch pedal on placed in PARK for recreational towing. You or others could be injured or killed if a manual transmission. • Manual transmissions must be placed in you leave the vehicle unattended with the gear (not in Neutral) for recreational towing. transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position 4. Turn the engine OFF. without first fully engaging the parking

145 5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEU- 5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. CAUTION! TRAL (N). 6. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired 6. Start the engine. Damage to the transmission may occur if position. the transmission is shifted into PARK with 7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE. the transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) and the NOTE: 8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal engine running. With the transfer case in When shifting the transfer case out of on manual transmissions) for five seconds NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine is NEUTRAL (N), the engine should remain and ensure that there is no vehicle OFF before shifting the transmission into OFF to avoid gear clash. PARK. movement. 7. Shift the automatic transmission into 9. Repeat steps seven and eight with auto- 13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle PARK, or place manual transmission in matic transmission in DRIVE or manual using a suitable tow bar. NEUTRAL. transmission in first gear. 14. Release the parking brake. 8. Release the brake pedal. 10. Turn the engine OFF. Shifting Out of NEUTRAL (N) 9. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 11. Firmly apply the parking brake. Use the following procedure to prepare your 10. Start the engine. 12. Shift the transmission into PARK or vehicle for normal usage. 11. Press and hold the brake pedal. place manual transmission in gear (NOT 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, 12. Release the parking brake. in NEUTRAL). leaving it connected to the tow vehicle. 13. Shift the transmission into gear, release 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on 3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position, manual transmissions), and check that but do not start the engine. the vehicle operates normally. 4. Press and hold the brake pedal.

146 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY HAZARD WARNING JACKING AND FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE. . . .163 FLASHERS...... 148 TIRE CHANGING ...... 156 TOWING A DISABLED BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 148 Jack/Spare Tire Stowage ...... 156 VEHICLE...... 164 Replacement Bulbs ...... 148 Preparations For Jacking ...... 157 Without The Ignition Key...... 166 Bulb Replacement ...... 149 Jacking Instructions ...... 157 Four–Wheel Drive Models ...... 166 JUMPSTARTING...... 160 Emergency Tow Hooks — FUSES...... 151 If Equipped ...... 166 General Information...... 152 Preparations For Jump Start...... 160 Jump Starting Procedure...... 161 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE Totally Integrated Power Module .....152 SYSTEM(EARS)...... 167 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . .162 EVENT DATA RECORDER GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . .163 (EDR)...... 167

147 HAZARD WARNING Push the switch to turn on the When you must leave the vehicle to seek Hazard Warning flasher. When the assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will FLASHERS switch is activated, all directional continue to operate even though the ignition The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located turn signals will flash on and off to is placed in the OFF position. on the instrument panel below the climate warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push NOTE: controls. the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY BULB REPLACEMENT Replacement Bulbs Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658 Heater Control Lamps (2) 194 Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger, and Rear Wash/Wipe) ** Soundbar Dome Lamp 912 ** Bulbs only available from authorized dealer.

148 Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Headlamps (2) H13 Premium Head Lamps LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) 3157NA Front Side Marker Lamps (2) 168 Fog Lamps PSX24W Rear Stop/Tail/Turn Lamps (2) 3157 Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer) Backup Lamps (2) 3157 License Lamp 194

NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.

Bulb Replacement Headlamp 4. Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1/4 turn counterclockwise and 1. Open hood and support using prop rod. NOTE: remove. Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo- 2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers 5. Remove the four screws holding the metal spheric conditions. This will usually clear as along the top 1/4 turn counterclockwise retaining ring. atmospheric conditions change to allow the and remove. condensation to change back into a vapor. 6. Remove the lamp from the collar. 3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate at one side and working toward the other. 7. Grasp the bulb and turn 1/4 turn the clearing process. counterclockwise. 149 8. Pull the bulb from the housing. Front Park/Turn Signal Front Fog Lamp 9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock 1. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers 1. Reach under the vehicle to access the position. along the top 1/4 turn counterclockwise back of the front fog lamp. 10. Remove connector from bulb. and remove. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector 11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and 2. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting from the front fog lamp connector push the connector locking tab to the at one side and working toward the other. receptacle. lock position. 3. Turn the socket assembly 1/4 turn coun- 3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch terclockwise and remove from housing. features and squeeze them together to CAUTION! Pull the bulb straight from the socket to unlock the bulb from the back of the front replace. fog lamp housing. Do not touch the new bulb with your fin- gers. Oil contamination will severely Front Side Marker 4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing and then connect IN CASE OF EMERGENCY shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in 1. Reach under the front fender flare and the replacement bulb. contact with any oily surface, clean the locate the front side marker socket. bulb with rubbing alcohol. 2. Turn the socket assembly counterclock- CAUTION! 12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb wise 1/3 turn and remove it from the 1/4 turn clockwise. housing. Pull the bulb straight from the Do not touch the new bulb with your fin- socket to replace. gers. Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.

150 Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup 2. Separate the housing from the body by FUSES Lamp pushing the lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the body. 1. Remove the two inboard screws attaching WARNING! the tail light housing to the body. DO NOT 3. Rotate the appropriate socket 1/4 turn REMOVE THE OUTBOARD SCREWS AT ANY counterclockwise, then remove it from the • When replacing a blown fuse, always use TIME. housing. an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. 4. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to Never replace a fuse with another fuse of replace. higher amp rating. Never replace a Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that result in serious personal injury, fire extends upward from the tailgate behind the and/or property damage. spare tire. If service is needed, obtain the • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that LED/Cover Assembly from your local autho- the ignition is off and that all the other rized dealer. services are switched off and/or disen- 1. Remove the spare tire. gaged. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact 2. Remove the four screws holding the lens/ an authorized dealer. cover in place on the spare tire carrier. • If a general protection fuse for safety 3. Disconnect the wire harness from the systems (air bag system, braking sys- Inboard Screw Location back of the LED cover. tem), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.

151 General Information TotallyIntegrated Power Module The fuses protect electrical systems against The Totally Integrated Power Module is lo- excessive current. cated in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, When a device does not work, you must check mini fuses, and relays. A label that identifies the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a each component is printed on the inside of break/melt. the cover. Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for extended periods of time with the engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Totally Integrated Power Module

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description J1 – – – J2 30 Amp Pink – Transfer Case Module J3 – – – J4 25 Amp Clear – Driver Door Node J5 25 Amp Clear – Passenger Door Node J6 40 Amp Green – Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump/Stability Control System J7 30 Amp Pink – Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valve/Stability Control System

152 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description J8 – – – J9 40 Amp Green – PZEV Sec Motor/Flex Fuel – If Equipped J10 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Wash Relay/Manifold Tuning Valve J11 30 Amp Pink – Sway Bar J12 – – – J13 60 Amp Yellow – Ignition Off Draw (IOD) – Main J14 40 Amp Green – Rear Defroster J15 40 Amp Green – Front Blower J17 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid J18 20 Amp Blue – Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Trans Range J19 60 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan J20 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper LO/HI J21 20 Amp Blue – Front/Rear Washer J22 – – Spare M1 – 15 Amp Blue Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)/Switch Stop Lamp Feed M2 – 20 Amp Yellow Relay Trailer Lighting (Stop lamp) M3 – 20 Amp Yellow Front/Rear Axle Locker Relay M4 – 2 Amp Grey Clock Spring M5 – 25 Amp Clear Power Inverter – If Equipped

153 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M6 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #1/Rain Sensor M7 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT) M8 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat M9 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat – If Equipped M10 – 15 Amp Blue Ignition Off Draw – Vehicle Entertainment System, Satellite Digital Audio Receiver (SDARS), DVD, Hands-Free Module, RADIO, Antenna, Universal Garage Door Opener, Vanity Lamp M11 – 10 Amp Red (Ignition Off Draw) Climate Control System, Underhood Lamp M12 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier M13 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Off Draw – Cabin Compartment Node, Wireless Control IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Module, SIREN, Multifunction Control Switch M14 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow (Export Only) M15 – 20 Amp Yellow Climate Control System, Rear View Mirror, Cabin Compartment Node, Transfer Case Switch, Multi-Function Control Switch, Tire Pressure Monitor, Glow Plug Module – Export Diesel Only M16 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module M17 – 15 Amp Blue Left Tail/License/Park Lamp M18 – 15 Amp Blue Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp M19 – 25 Amp Clear Auto Shut Down (ASD #1 and #2) M20 – 15 Amp Blue Cabin Compartment Node Interior Light, Switch Bank M21 – 20 Amp Yellow Auto Shut Down (ASD #3)

154 Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description M22 – 10 Amp Red Right Horn (HI/LOW) M23 – 10 Amp Red Left Horn (HI/LOW) M24 – 25 Amp Clear Rear Wiper M25 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump, Diesel Lift Pump – Export Only M26 – 10 Amp Red Power Window Switch, Driver Window Switch M27 – 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch Feed, Wireless Module M28 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Module M29 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain M30 – 15 Amp Blue Wiper Motor Frt, J1962 Diagnostic Feed M31 – 20 Amp Yellow Backup Lamps M32 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Controller, TT EUROPE M33 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain Controller M34 – 10 Amp Red Park Assist, Climate Control System, Headlamp Wash, Compass M35 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors M36 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet M37 – 10 Amp Red Anti-Lock Brake System, Electronic Stability Control, Stop Lamp Switch, Fuel Pump Relay M38 – 25 Amp Clear Lock/Unlock Motors

155 CAUTION! JACKING AND Jack/Spare Tire Stowage TIRE CHANGING The jack and lug wrench are located in the • When installing the Integrated Power rear storage compartment. Module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully WARNING! NOTE: Turn the black plastic wing nut counterclock- latched. Failure to do so may allow water • Do not attempt to change a tire on the wise to loosen the jack from the storage bin. to get into the Integrated Power Module, side of the vehicle close to moving traf- and possibly result in an electrical sys- fic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid tem failure. the danger of being hit when operating • When replacing a blown fuse, it is impor- the jack or changing the wheel. tant to use only a fuse having the correct • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dan- amperage rating. The use of a fuse with gerous. The vehicle could slip off the a rating other than indicated may result jack and fall on you. You could be IN CASE OF EMERGENCY in a dangerous electrical system over- crushed. Never put any part of your body load. If a properly rated fuse continues under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you to blow, it indicates a problem in the need to get under a raised vehicle, take circuit that must be corrected. it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should Plastic Wing Nut Location not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

156 Spare Tire Removal 4. Shift the automatic transmission into Jacking Instructions PARK, or a manual transmission into To remove the spare tire from the carrier, REVERSE. remove the tire cover, if equipped, and re- WARNING! 5. Turn the ignition to LOCK. move the lug nuts with the lug wrench, turn- Carefully follow these tire changing warning them counterclockwise. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel ings to help prevent personal injury or NOTE: diagonally opposite of the jacking posi- damage to your vehicle: • Always park on a firm, level surface as If you have added aftermarket accessories to tion. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel. far from the edge of the roadway as the spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot ex- possible before raising the vehicle. ceed a gross weight of 85 lbs (38.5 kg) • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. including the weight of the spare tire. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the Preparations For Jacking wheel to be raised. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an 1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or automatic transmission in PARK; a slippery areas. manual transmission in REVERSE. • Never start or run the engine with the WARNING! vehicle on a jack. • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when Do not attempt to change a tire on the side it is on a jack. of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull • Do not get under the vehicle when it is far enough off the road to avoid being hit on a jack. If you need to get under a when operating the jack or changing the raised vehicle, take it to a service center wheel. where it can be raised on a lift. Wheel Blocked • Only use the jack in the positions indi- 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. NOTE: cated and for lifting this vehicle during a 3. Apply the parking brake. Passengers should not remain in the vehicle tire change. when the vehicle is being jacked. 157 4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear WARNING! CAUTION! of the vehicle. Place the jack under the • If working on or near a roadway, be Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by axle tube, as shown. Do not raise the ve- extremely careful of motor traffic. jacking on locations other than those indi- hicle until you are sure the jack is fully • To assure that spare tires, flat or in- cated. engaged. flated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the 1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from ground. the stored location. 2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. 3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Con-

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY nect the jack handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.

Front Jack Engagement Location

Warning Label

158 9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down WARNING! on the wrench while tightening for in- Raising the vehicle higher than necessary creased leverage. Alternate nuts until can make the vehicle less stable. It could each nut has been tightened twice. Refer slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical Raise the vehicle only enough to remove Specifications” for correct lug nut torque. the tire. 10. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks. 6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel. 11. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their 7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the ve- proper locations. hicle and install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise. WARNING! A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a Rear Jack Engagement Location WARNING! collision or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the 5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off jack parts and the spare tire in the places screw clockwise. Raise the vehicle only the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts provided. until the tire just clears the surface and fully until the vehicle has been lowered. enough clearance is obtained to install Failure to follow this warning may result in the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides serious injury. maximum stability. 8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left, and remove the jack.

159 JUMP STARTING Preparations For Jump Start WARNING! If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can The battery in your vehicle is located in the You can be injured by moving fan be jump started using a set of jumper cables right rear of the engine compartment, behind blades. and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a the Power Distribution Center. • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, portable battery booster pack. Jump starting watch bands and bracelets that could can be dangerous if done improperly, so make an inadvertent electrical contact. please follow the procedures in this section You could be seriously injured. carefully. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate WARNING! hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks Do not attempt jump starting if the battery away from the battery.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. 1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and turn the CAUTION! ignition to LOCK. Do not use a portable battery booster pack 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnec- or any other booster source with a system Positive Battery Post essary electrical accessories. voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to 3. If using another vehicle to jump start the the battery, starter motor, alternator or WARNING! electrical system may occur. battery, park the vehicle within the • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling jumper cables reach, set the parking NOTE: fan whenever the hood is raised. It can brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. When using a portable battery booster pack, start anytime the ignition switch is ON. follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions. 160 Connecting The Jumper Cables 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the WARNING! 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper booster battery, let the engine idle a few Do not allow vehicles to touch each other cable to the remote positive (+) post of the minutes, and then start the engine in the as this could establish a ground connec- discharged vehicle. vehicle with the discharged battery. tion and personal injury could result. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive CAUTION! Jump Starting Procedure (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2000 rpm since it provides no WARNING! 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper charging benefit, wastes fuel and can cable to the negative (-) post of the Failure to follow this jump starting proce- damage booster vehicle engine. booster battery. dure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative 6. Once the engine is started, remove the (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground jumper cables in the reverse sequence: CAUTION! (exposed metal part of the discharged Disconnecting The Jumper Cables vehicle’s engine) away from the battery 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the Failure to follow these procedures could and the fuel injection system. jumper cable from the engine ground of result in damage to the charging system of the vehicle with the discharged battery. the booster vehicle or the discharged ve- WARNING! hicle. 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the nega- Do not connect the jumper cable to the tive (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) NOTE: negative (-) post of the discharged battery. post of the booster battery. Make sure at all times that unused ends of The resulting electrical spark could cause jumper cables are not contacting each other the battery to explode and could result in 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the or either vehicle while making connections. personal injury. Only use the specific jumper cable from the positive (+) post of ground point, do not use any other exposed the booster battery. metal parts.

161 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the posi- IF YOUR ENGINE NOTE: tive (+) jumper cable from the remote There are steps that you can take to slow positive (+) post of the discharged OVERHEATS down an impending overheat condition: vehicle. In any of the following situations, you can • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. 5. Reinstall the protective cover over the reduce the potential for overheating by taking The A/C system adds heat to the engine remote positive (+) post of the discharged the appropriate action. cooling system and turning the A/C off can vehicle. help remove this heat. • On the highways — slow down. • You can also turn the temperature control If frequent jump starting is required to start • In city traffic — while stopped, shift trans- your vehicle you should have the battery and to maximum heat, the mode control to floor mission into NEUTRAL, but do not increase charging system tested at an authorized and the blower control to high. This allows engine idle speed. dealer. the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY CAUTION! CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could Accessories plugged into the vehicle WARNING! damage your vehicle. If the temperature power outlets draw power from the vehi- gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop cle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., You or others can be badly burned by hot the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from conditioner turned off until the pointer plugged in long enough without engine your radiator. If you see or hear steam drops back into the normal range. If the operation, the vehicle’s battery will dis- coming from under the hood, do not open pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear charge sufficiently to degrade battery life the hood until the radiator has had time to continuous chimes, turn the engine off and/or prevent the engine from starting. cool. Never try to open a cooling system immediately and call for service. pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

162 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE 3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE remove the gear selector override access cover (located to the right of the gear If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or selector). snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left 4. Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN position, but do not start the engine. to clear the area around the front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE 5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) brake pedal. or SECOND GEAR and REVERSE (with 6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into manual transmission), while gently pressing the access port, and push and hold the the accelerator. Use the least amount of ac- override release lever down. celerator pedal pressure that will maintain 7. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL the rocking motion, without spinning the position. wheels or racing the engine. 8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. CAUTION! Gear Selector Override Location 9. Reinstall the gear selector override access Racing the engine or spinning the wheels If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cover. may lead to transmission overheating and cannot be moved out of the PARK position, failure. Allow the engine to idle with the you can use the following procedure to tem- transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion porarily move the gear selector: cycles. This will minimize overheating and 1. Turn the engine OFF. reduce the risk of clutch or transmission 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

163 NOTE: Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the Elec- WARNING! CAUTION! tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in "Par- Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shift- tial Off" mode, before rocking the vehicle. Forces generated by excessive wheel ing between DRIVE/SECOND GEAR and Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” speeds may cause damage, or even failure, REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster in “Safety” in your Owner’s Manual for fur- of the axle and tires. A tire could explode than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain ther details. Once the vehicle has been freed, and injure someone. Do not spin your damage may result. push the "ESC Off" switch again to restore vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph • Revving the engine or spinning the "ESC On" mode. (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds wheels too fast may lead to transmission continuously without stopping when you overheating and failure. It can also dam- are stuck and do not let anyone near a age the tires. Do not spin the wheels spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Tow- ing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.

164 Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 4WD MODELS See instructions under “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”. • Automatic Transmission in PARK Flat Tow NONE • Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT in NEUTRAL) • Transfer Case in NEUTRAL • Tow in forward direction Front NOT ALLOWED Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required If you must use the accessories (wipers, de- to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only frosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition CAUTION! tow bars and other equipment designed for must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC • Do not use sling type equipment when this purpose, following equipment manufac- position. towing. Vehicle damage may occur. turer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is If the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to • When securing the vehicle to a flat bed mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing “Gear Selector Override” in this section for truck, do not attach to front or rear device to main structural members of the instructions on shifting the automatic trans- suspension components. Damage to vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brack- mission out of PARK for towing. your vehicle may result from improper ets. State and local laws regarding vehicles towing. under tow must be observed. NOTE: For RHD Postal models, refer to the Postal Supplement for towing instructions.

165 Without The Ignition Key CAUTION! WARNING! Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK posi- • Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used • Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck (if the remaining wheels are on the vehicle. Chains may break, causing seri- tion. The only approved method of towing ground). Internal damage to the trans- ous injury or death. without the ignition key is with a flatbed mission or transfer case will occur if a • Stand clear of vehicles when pulling truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary front or rear wheel lift is used when with tow hooks. Tow straps may become to prevent damage to the vehicle. towing. disengaged, causing serious injury. Four–Wheel Drive Models • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe CAUTION! The manufacturer recommends towing with transmission and/or transfer case dam- all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable meth- age. Damage from improper towing is Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to ods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with not covered under the New Vehicle Lim- rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not IN CASE OF EMERGENCY one end of the vehicle raised and the oppo- ited Warranty. use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or site end on a towing dolly. highway towing. You could damage your Emergency TowHooks — If Equipped vehicle. Tow straps are recommended If flatbed equipment is not available and the when towing the vehicle, chains may If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be cause vehicle damage. towed (in the forward direction, with ALL they are mounted in the front and the rear. wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is NOTE: in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in For off-road recovery, it is recommended to PARK (for automatic transmissions) or in gear use both of the front tow hooks to minimize (NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions). the risk of damage to the vehicle. Always use Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting an appropriately rated tow strap. And Operating” for detailed instructions.

166 ENHANCED ACCIDENT EVENT DATA RECORDER RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Accident Response System. Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in under- Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys- standing how a vehicle’s systems performed tems” in “Safety” for further information on under certain crash or near crash-like situa- the Enhanced Accident Response System tions, such as an air bag deployment or hit- (EARS) function. ting a road obstacle. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys- tems” in “Safety” for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).

167 168 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE SCHEDULED SERVICING ...... 170 DEALERSERVICE...... 183 DEPARTMENT OF Maintenance Plan ...... 171 Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 183 TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle...... 174 Manual Transmission ...... 186 TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...... 204 Treadwear ...... 204 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 175 RAISINGTHEVEHICLE...... 186 Traction Grades ...... 204 3.6L Engine ...... 175 TIRES...... 187 Temperature Grades...... 205 Checking Oil Level ...... 176 Tire Safety Information ...... 187 Cooling System ...... 176 Tires — General Information ...... 195 INTERIORS...... 205 Adding Washer Fluid ...... 177 Tire Types ...... 199 Seats And Fabric Parts ...... 205 Brake System ...... 177 Spare Tires — If Equipped ...... 200 Plastic And Coated Parts...... 206 Automatic Transmission ...... 178 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...... 201 Leather Parts...... 206 Maintenance-Free Battery ...... 180 Tire Chains (Traction Devices)...... 203 Glass Surfaces ...... 207 Air Conditioner Maintenance ...... 180 Tire Rotation Recommendations .....203

169 SCHEDULED SERVICING On non-instrument cluster display equipped Severe Duty All Models vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash in the in- Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic strument cluster odometer and a single (6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time oil change indicator system. The oil change chime will sound, indicating that an oil if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off indicator system will remind you that it is change is necessary. road environment or is operated predomi- time to take your vehicle in for scheduled Your authorized dealer will reset the oil nately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. maintenance. change indicator message after completing This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Based on engine operation conditions, the oil the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil Duty. change is performed by someone other than change indicator message will illuminate. Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: This means that service is required for your your authorized dealer, the message can be • Check engine oil level vehicle. Operating conditions such as fre- reset by referring to the steps described un- quent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or der “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting • Check windshield washer fluid level To Know Your Instrument Panel” in this guide cold ambient temperatures will influence • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for further information. when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- for unusual wear or damage quired” message is displayed. Severe Oper- NOTE: • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser- ating Conditions can cause the change oil Under no circumstances should oil change voir, brake master cylinder, power steering SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE message to illuminate as early as intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), and automatic transmission, and fill as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. twelve months or 350 hours of engine run needed Have your vehicle serviced as soon as pos- time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours • Check function of all interior and exterior sible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). of engine run or idle time is generally only a lights concern for fleet customers. On vehicles equipped with instrument cluster display, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

170 Maintenance Plan Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the maintenance plan on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: • Change oil and filter • Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required • Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake • Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses • Inspect exhaust system • Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions • Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary.

171 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers: 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Additional Inspections Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, XXX X X X X and replace if necessary. Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. X X X X Inspect the brake linings, replace as XXX X X X X necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped XXX X X X X with four wheel disc brakes. Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Additional Maintenance Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X Replace spark plugs ** X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) XX whichever comes first. Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the XX following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

172 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers: 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Change the automatic transmission fluid X and filter. Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial XX X X X service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C). Change transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, XX fleet, or frequent trailer towing. Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X Change front and rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road XX X or frequent trailer towing.

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

173 WARNING! Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) • You can be badly injured working on or or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle around a motor vehicle. Do only service is operated in a dusty and off road environ- work for which you have the knowledge ment or is operated predominately at idle or and the right equipment. If you have any only very low engine RPM’s. This type of doubt about your ability to perform a vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

174 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3.6L Engine

1 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 — Battery 8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (Under Engine Cover) 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Engine Oil Fill 11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

175 Checking Oil Level Cooling System Engine Coolant Checks To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle's Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protec- engine, the engine oil must be maintained at WARNING! tion every 12 months (before the onset of the correct level. The engine oil level should freezing weather, where applicable). If the • You or others can be badly burned by hot be checked five minutes after a warmed up engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam engine has been shut off. appearance, the system should be drained, from your radiator. If you see or hear flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level steam coming from under the hood, do (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C con- ground will improve the accuracy of the oil not open the hood until the radiator has denser (if equipped) or radiator for any accu- level readings. Always maintain the oil level had time to cool. Never open a cooling mulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding system pressure cap when the radiator by gently spraying water from a garden hose 1 quart (0.95 liters) of oil when the reading is or coolant bottle is hot. vertically down the face of the A/C condenser at the bottom of the crosshatch zone will • Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core. result in a reading at the top of the cross- away from the radiator cooling fan when hatch zone on these engines. the hood is raised. The fan starts auto- Check the engine cooling system hoses for matically and may start at any time, brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and CAUTION! whether the engine is running or not. tightness of the connection at the coolant SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE • When working near the radiator cooling recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the en- Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or tire system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE This could damage your engine. fan is temperature controlled and can COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.

176 Adding Washer Fluid Brake System the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced. If the The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers In order to assure brake system performance, brake fluid is abnormally low, check the sys- and the rear window washer (if equipped) is all brake system components should be in- tem for leaks. shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the spected periodically. Refer to the “Mainte- engine compartment. Be sure to check the nance Plan” in this section for the proper Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni- fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reser- maintenance intervals. cal Specifications” for further information. voir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the WARNING! WARNING! washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure • Use only manufacturer's recommended the wiper blades; this will help blade perfor- and possibly a collision. Driving with your brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri- mance. foot resting or riding on the brake pedal cants” in “Technical Specifications” for can result in abnormally high brake tem- further information. Using the wrong To prevent freeze-up of your windshield peratures, excessive lining wear, and pos- type of brake fluid can severely damage washer system in cold weather, select a solu- sible brake damage. You would not have your brake system and/or impair its per- tion or mixture that meets or exceeds the your full braking capacity in an emergency. formance. The proper type of brake fluid temperature range of your climate. This rat- for your vehicle is also identified on the ing information can be found on most washer Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder original factory installed hydraulic mas- fluid containers. The fluid level of the master cylinder should ter cylinder reservoir. • To avoid contamination from foreign WARNING! be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or immediately if the brake system warning matter or moisture, use only new brake Commercial windshield washer solvents light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly are flammable. They could ignite and burn level within the designated marks on the side closed container. Keep the master cylin- you. Care must be exercised when filling or of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. der reservoir cap secured at all times. working around the washer solution. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylin- Brake fluid in a open container absorbs der area before removing cap. With disc moisture from the air resulting in a lower brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as 177 tions” for fluid specifications. It is important additives to the transmission. The only ex- WARNING! to maintain the transmission fluid at the ception to this policy is the use of special boiling point. This may cause it to boil correct level using the recommended fluid. dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using unexpectedly during hard or prolonged transmission sealers as they may adversely NOTE: braking, resulting in sudden brake fail- affect seals. ure. This could result in a collision. No chemical flushes should be used in any • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can transmission; only the approved lubricant CAUTION! result in spilling brake fluid on hot en- should be used. gine parts, causing the brake fluid to Do not use chemical flushes in your trans- catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage CAUTION! mission as the chemicals can damage your painted and vinyl surfaces, care should transmission components. Such damage be taken to avoid its contact with these Using a transmission fluid other than the is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited surfaces. manufacturer’s recommended fluid may Warranty. • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to cause deterioration in transmission shift contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal quality and/or torque converter shudder, Fluid Level Check components could be damaged, causing and will require more frequent fluid and It is best to check the fluid level when the partial or complete brake failure. This filter changes. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri- SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE could result in a collision. cants” in “Technical Specifications” for transmission is at normal operating tempera- fluid specifications. ture (approximately 180°F/82°C). This oc- Automatic Transmission curs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature, the Selection Of Lubricant Special Additives fluid cannot be held comfortably between the It is important to use the proper transmission The manufacturer strongly recommends fingertips. fluid to ensure optimum transmission perfor- against using any special additives in the Use the following procedure to check the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid mance and life. Use only the manufacturer's transmission fluid level properly: specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica- additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid 178 2. Remove the engine cover by pulling it up proper level. Do not overfill. Use ONLY the off the mounting studs (two in the front specified fluid (refer to "Fluids And Lubri- CAUTION! and two in the rear). cants" under “Technical Specifications” If the fluid temperature is below 50°F 3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at for fluid specifications). After adding any (10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. least 60 seconds, and leave the engine quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, Do not add fluid until the temperature is running for the rest of this procedure. wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil elevated enough to produce an accurate to fully drain into the transmission before reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, 4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press rechecking the fluid level. to warm the fluid. the brake pedal. 5. Place the gear selector momentarily into NOTE: 8. Reinstall the engine cover and snap it down securely onto the four mounting each gear position (allowing time for the • The holes in the dipstick will be full of studs. transmission to fully engage in each posi- fluid if the actual level is at or above the tion), ending with the transmission in hole. 9. Check for leaks. Release the parking PARK. brake. • If it is necessary to check the transmis- 6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and sion below the operating temperature, NOTE: reinsert it until seated. the fluid level should be between the To prevent dirt and water from entering the 7. Remove the dipstick again and note the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick transmission after checking or replenishing fluid level on both sides. The fluid level with the fluid at approximately 80°F fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is reading is only valid if there is a solid (27°C). If the fluid level is correctly properly reseated. It is normal for the dipstick coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick. established at 80° F (27°C), it should cap to spring back slightly from its fully Note that the holes in the dipstick will be be between the HOT (upper) reference seated position, as long as its seal remains full of fluid if the actual level is at or above holes when the transmission reaches engaged in the dipstick tube. the hole. The fluid level should be be- 180° F (82°C). Remember it is best to tween the HOT (upper) reference holes on check the level at the normal operating Fluid And Filter Changes the dipstick at normal operating tempera- temperature. ture. If the fluid level is low, add fluid Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the through the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper maintenance intervals. 179 In addition, change the fluid and filter if the Air Conditioner Maintenance fluid becomes contaminated (with water, WARNING! For best possible performance, your air con- etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable ditioner should be checked and serviced by for any reason. clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related ac- an authorized dealer at the start of each warm Maintenance-Free Battery cessories contain lead and lead com- season. This service should include cleaning pounds. Wash hands after handling. of the condenser fins and a performance test. Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance- Drive belt tension should also be checked at free battery. You will never have to add water, this time. nor is periodic maintenance required. CAUTION! • It is essential when replacing the cables WARNING! WARNING! on the battery that the positive cable is • Use only refrigerants and compressor • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution attached to the positive post and the lubricants approved by the manufac- and can burn or even blind you. Do not negative cable is attached to the nega- turer for your air conditioning system. allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, tive post. Battery posts are marked posi- Some unapproved refrigerants are flam- skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps mable and can explode, injuring you.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE battery when attaching clamps. If acid Other unapproved refrigerants or lubri- splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the should be tight on the terminal posts cants can cause the system to fail, re- area immediately with large amounts of and free of corrosion. quiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty water. Refer to “Jump Starting Proce- • If a “fast charger” is used while the Information Book, located in your own- dure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both er’s information kit, for further warranty further information. vehicle battery cables before connecting information. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. the charger to the battery. Do not use a • The air conditioning system contains re- Keep flame or sparks away from the “fast charger” to provide starting volt- frigerant under high pressure. To avoid battery. Do not use a booster battery or age. risk of personal injury or damage to the any other booster source with an output system, adding refrigerant or any repair

180 Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air WARNING! R–1234yf inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform requiring lines to be disconnected should the following procedure to replace the filter: be done by an experienced technician. R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by 1. Open the glove compartment and remove the Environmental Protection Agency and is all contents. CAUTION! an ozone-friendly substance with a low 2. Push in on the sides of the glove compart- Do not use chemical flushes in your air global-warming potential. The manufacturer ment and lower the door. conditioning system as the chemicals can recommends that air conditioning service be damage your air conditioning components. performed by an authorized dealer using re- Such damage is not covered by the New covery and recycling equipment. Vehicle Limited Warranty. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants. — If Equipped Air Conditioning Filter Replacement R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a (A/C Air Filter) hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone- friendly substance. The manufacturer recom- WARNING! mends that air conditioning service be per- Do not remove the cabin air filter while the formed by an authorized dealer or other vehicle is running, or while the ignition is service facilities using recovery and recycling in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the Glove Compartment equipment. cabin air filter removed and the blower operating, the blower can contact hands 1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops NOTE: 2 — Glove Compartment Use only manufacturer approved A/C system and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury. PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. 181 3. Pivot the glove compartment downward. 5. Open the two air filter access doors. 7. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position indicators pointing in the same 4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that se- 6. Remove the two particulate air filters from direction as removal. cure the two air filter access doors to the the HVAC air inlet housing. Pull the filter HVAC housing. elements straight out of the housing, one at a time. CAUTION! The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often.

8. Close A/C Air Filter access doors and secure retaining tabs. 9. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE proper maintenance intervals. Air Filter Retaining Tabs 1 — Left Retaining Tab Air Filter Access Door Open 2 — Right Retaining Tab 1—Air Conditioning Filter Access Door 2 — Air Conditioning Air Filter

182 DEALER SERVICE Windshield Wiper Blades The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper An authorized dealer has the qualified service Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades performance problems are experienced. This personnel, special tools, and equipment to and the windshield periodically with a sponge inspection should include the following perform all service operations in an expert or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. points: manner. Service Manuals are available which This will remove accumulations of salt or road • Wear Or Uneven Edges include detailed service information for your film. vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals be- • Foreign Material Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long fore attempting any procedure yourself. periods may cause deterioration of the wiper • Hardening Or Cracking NOTE: blades. Always use washer fluid when using • Deformation Or Fatigue Intentional tampering with emissions control the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, systems may void your warranty and could windshield. replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a result in civil penalties being assessed new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper against you. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade arm or blade that is damaged. WARNING! rubber out of contact with petroleum prod- Wiper Blade Removal/Installation ucts such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. You can be badly injured working on or CAUTION! around a motor vehicle. Only do service NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de- work for which you have the knowledge Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back pending on geographical area and frequency and the proper equipment. If you have any against the glass without the wiper blade doubt about your ability to perform a ser- of use. Poor performance of blades may be in place or the glass may be damaged. vice job, take your vehicle to a competent present with chattering, marks, water lines or mechanic. wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

183 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the 3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in wiper arm, press the release tab on the the wiper blade from the wiper arm. the full up position. wiper blade and while holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.

Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Wiper Blade With Release Tab 1 — Wiper Blade In Locked Position 2 — Wiper Arm 1 — Wiper Blade Wiper Blade With Release Tab 3 — Release Tab 2 — Wiper Arm In Unlocked Position 3 — Release Tab 1 — Wiper Blade 2 — Wiper Arm 4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. 3 — Release Tab

184 Installing The Front Wipers Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation With your left hand hold the wiper arm as 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until 1. Remove the rear wiper arm pivot cap To you pull the wiper blade away from the the wiper arm is in the full up position. access the wiper arm nut. wiper arm past its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on receptacle on the end of the wiper arm. the tip of the wiper arm. 3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm NOTE: through the opening in the wiper blade. Resistance will be accompanied by an audible snap. 4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click. 5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.

Rear Wiper Assembly 1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap 2 — Wiper Arm 3 — Wiper Blade

Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm 2. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, grasp the wiper blade nearest to 1 — Wiper Arm wiper arm with your right hand. 2 — Wiper Blade

185 3. Still grasping the wiper blade, move the Installing The Rear Wiper Fluid Level Check wiper blade away from the wiper arm to 1. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the Check the fluid level by removing the fill disengage. opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab plug. The fluid level should be between the the bottom end of the wiper arm with one bottom of the fill hole and a point not more hand, and apply pressure to the wiper than 3/16 of an inch (4.76 mm) below the blade flush with the wiper arm until it bottom of the hole. snaps into place. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the 2. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and proper level. snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into place. Frequency Of Fluid Change Manual Transmission Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory Selection Of Lubricant lubrication for the life of the vehicle. If the fluid becomes contaminated with water, it Use only manufacturer's recommended should be changed immediately. Otherwise, manual transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids change the fluid as recommended in the

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica- Maintenance Plan. Refer to the “Mainte- Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm tions” for further information. nance Plan” for the proper maintenance in- 1 — Wiper Arm tervals. 2 — Wiper Blade RAISING THE VEHICLE In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service station.

186 TIRES Tire Markings NOTE: • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based Tire Safety Information on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires Tire safety information will cover aspects of have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall the following information: Tire Markings, Tire preceding the size designation. Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and Example: P215/65R15 95H. Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. • European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section Tire Markings width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards size designation. Code (TIN) Example: 215/65R15 96H. 2 — Size Designation • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is 3 — Service Description based on U.S. design standards. The size 4 — Maximum Load designation for LT-Metric tires is the same 5 — Maximum Pressure as for P-Metric tires except for the letters 6 — Treadwear, Traction and “LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre- Temperature Grades ceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. 187 • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE • Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code • "R" means radial construction, or • "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

188 EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index • A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol • A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions • The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: • XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or • LL = Light load tire or • C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

189 Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the TIN is not found on the outboard side, the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will then you will find it on the inboard side of the have the full TIN, including the date code, tire. located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation • This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) • 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) • 01 means the year 2001 • Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

190 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

191 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about the: NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is 1. Number of people that can be carried in listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear the vehicle. edge of the driver's side door. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. Check the inflation pressure of each tire, 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. including the spare tire (if equipped), at least 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, monthly and inflate to the recommended rear, and spare tires. pressure for your vehicle. Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to Tire And Loading Information Placard the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of your Owner’s Manual. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the Tire And Loading Information Placard front and rear axles must not be exceeded. Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

192 To determine the maximum loading condi- (4) The resulting figure equals the Metric Example For Load Limit tions of your vehicle, locate the statement available amount of cargo and luggage For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg “The combined weight of occupants and load capacity. For example, if “XXX” and there will be five 68 kg passengers in cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there your vehicle, the amount of available cargo on the Tire and Loading Information placard. will be five 150 lb passengers in your and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635- The combined weight of occupants, cargo/ vehicle, the amount of available cargo 340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight refer- and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. NOTE: enced here. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your Steps For Determining Correct Load (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. The following table shows ex- Limit— amples on how to calculate total load, vehicle. That weight may not safely cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of (1) Locate the statement “The com- exceed the available cargo and lug- your vehicle with varying seating configura- bined weight of occupants and cargo gage load capacity calculated in Step tions and number and size of occupants. should never exceed XXX kg or 4. This table is for illustration purposes only XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. and may not be accurate for the seating and (6) If your vehicle will be towing a load carry capacity of your vehicle. (2) Determine the combined weight of trailer, load from your trailer will be the driver and passengers that will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult riding in your vehicle. this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and lug- (3) Subtract the combined weight of gage load capacity of your vehicle. the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

193 • For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

194 Safety Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect WARNING! the stability of the vehicle and can produce a Overloading of your tires is dangerous. WARNING! feeling of sluggish response or over respon- Overloading can cause tire failure, affect siveness in the steering. • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous vehicle handling, and increase your stop- NOTE: ping distance. Use tires of the recom- and can cause collisions. mended load capacity for your vehicle. • Underinflation increases tire flexing and • Unequal tire pressures from side to side Never overload them. can result in overheating and tire failure. may cause erratic and unpredictable steer- • Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to ing response. Tires — General Information cushion shock. Objects on the road and • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may chuckholes can cause damage that re- cause the vehicle to drift left or right. Tire Pressure sult in tire failure. • Overinflated or underinflated tires can Fuel Economy Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to affect vehicle handling and can fail sud- the safe and satisfactory operation of your Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling denly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by resistance resulting in higher fuel consump- • Unequal tire pressures can cause steer- improper tire pressure: tion. ing problems. You could lose control of • Safety and Vehicle Stability your vehicle. Tread Wear • Economy • Unequal tire pressures from one side of Improper cold tire inflation pressures can the vehicle to the other can cause the • Tread Wear cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced vehicle to drift to the right or left. tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire • Ride Comfort • Always drive with each tire inflated to replacement. the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

195 Tire Inflation Pressures 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure The proper cold tire inflation pressure is The manufacturer advocates driving at safe must not exceed the maximum inflation pres- speeds and within posted speed limits. listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge sure molded into the tire sidewall. of the driver's side door. Where speed limits or conditions are such Check tire pressures more often if subject to that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, At least once a month: a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good pressures vary with temperature changes. very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an make a visual judgement when determining (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature authorized tire dealer or original equipment proper inflation. Tires may look properly change. Keep this in mind when checking vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat- inflated even when they are under-inflated. tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible Winter. pressures. damage. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F WARNING! CAUTION! (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which High speed driving with your vehicle under After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for maximum load is dangerous. The added sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. this outside temperature condition. strain on your tires could cause them to This will prevent moisture and dirt from fail. You could have a serious collision. Do entering the valve stem, which could dam- Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum age the valve stem. (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT capacity at continuous speeds above reduce this normal pressure build up or your 75 mph (120 km/h). Inflation pressures specified on the placard tire pressure will be too low. are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 196 Radial Ply Tires Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that Tire Spinning have experienced a loss of pressure should be When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice con- replaced immediately with another Run Flat WARNING! ditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels tire of identical size and service description above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than Combining radial ply tires with other types (Load Index and Speed Symbol). of tires on your vehicle will cause your 30 seconds continuously without stopping. vehicle to handle poorly. The instability Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In could cause a collision. Always use radial Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive Case Of Emergency” for further information. ply tires in sets of four. Never combine 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after them with other types of tires. a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid WARNING! loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat Tire Repair mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. If your tire becomes damaged, it may be inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi Forces generated by excessive wheel repaired if it meets the following criteria: (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A run flat mode it has limited driving capabili- tire could explode and injure someone. Do • The tire has not been driven on when flat. ties and needs to be replaced immediately. A not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than • The damage is only on the tread section of Run Flat tire is not repairable. 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 sec- your tire (sidewall damage is not repair- onds continuously when you are stuck, and It is not recommended driving a vehicle able). do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while no matter what the speed. • The puncture is no greater thana¼ofan a tire is in the run flat mode. inch (6 mm). See the tire pressure monitoring section for Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire re- more information. pairs and additional information.

197 Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Tread wear indicators are in the original The service life of a tire is dependent upon Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, equipment tires to help you in determining varying factors including, but not limited to: and gasoline. when your tires should be replaced. • Driving style. Replacement Tires • Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns The tires on your new vehicle provide a bal- to develop across the tire tread. These ab- ance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold normal wear patterns will reduce tread life, tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer resulting in the need for earlier tire replace- strongly recommends that you use tires ment. Tire Tread equivalent to the originals in size, quality and • Distance driven. performance when replacement is needed. 1 — Worn Tire • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indi- 2 — New Tire of V or higher, and Summer tires typically cators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE These indicators are molded into the bottom tires per the vehicle scheduled mainte- your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol of the tread grooves. They will appear as nance is highly recommended. for your tire will be found on the original bands when the tread depth becomes a equipment tire sidewall. 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is WARNING! worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in Tires and the spare tire should be replaced should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement the “Tire Safety Information” section of this after six years, regardless of the remaining Tires” in this section for further information. manual for more information relating to the tread. Failure to follow this warning can Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

198 It is recommended to replace the two front Tire Types tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just WARNING! one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s resulting in serious injury or death. Use All Season Tires — If Equipped handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make only the tire and wheel sizes with load All Season tires provide traction for all sea- sure that the wheel’s specifications match ratings approved for your vehicle. sons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter). those of the original wheels. • Never use a tire with a smaller load index Traction levels may vary between different all or capacity, other than what was origi- season tires. All season tires can be identified It is recommended you contact an authorized nally equipped on your vehicle. Using a by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on tire dealer or original equipment dealer with tire with a smaller load index could re- the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in any questions you may have on tire specifica- sult in tire overloading and failure. You sets of four; failure to do so may adversely tions or capability. Failure to use equivalent could lose control and have a collision. affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. replacement tires may adversely affect the • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. having adequate speed capability can Summer Or Three Season Tires — result in sudden tire failure and loss of If Equipped vehicle control. WARNING! Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to • Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, CAUTION! be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is or speed rating other than that specified equipped with Summer tires, be aware these for your vehicle. Some combinations of Replacing original tires with tires of a tires are not designed for Winter or cold unapproved tires and wheels may different size may result in false speedom- driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your change suspension dimensions and per- eter and odometer readings. vehicle when ambient temperatures are less formance characteristics, resulting in than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with changes to steering, handling, and brak- ice or snow. For more information, contact an ing of your vehicle. This can cause unauthorized dealer. predictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You Summer tires do not contain the all season could lose control and have a collision designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in 199 sets of four; failure to do so may adversely Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. than what was originally equipped with your CAUTION! vehicle and should not be operated at sus- Because of the reduced ground clearance, WARNING! tained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For do not take your vehicle through an auto- speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to matic car wash with a compact or limited Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice con- original equipment or an authorized tire use temporary spare installed. Damage to ditions. You could lose vehicle control, dealer for recommended safe operating the vehicle may result. resulting in severe injury or death. Driving speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pres- too fast for conditions also creates the sures. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire possibility of loss of vehicle control. While studded tires improve performance on And Wheel — If Equipped Snow Tires ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare surfaces may be poorer than that of non- tire and wheel equivalent in look and func- Some areas of the country require the use of studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tion to the original equipment tire and wheel snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can tires; therefore, local laws should be checked found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” before using these tire types. This spare tire may be used in the tire rota- symbol on the tire sidewall. Spare Tires — If Equipped tion for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE If you need snow tires, option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit select tires equivalent the recommended tire rotation pattern. in size and type to the instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire original equipment Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” in Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped the Owner’s Manual for further information. tires. Use snow tires The compact spare is for temporary emer- only in sets of four; gency use only. You can identify if your ve- failure to do so may hicle is equipped with a compact spare by adversely affect the looking at the spare tire description on the safety and handling of your vehicle. Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the 200 sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire de- handling. Since it is not the same as your scriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” WARNING! original equipment tire, replace (or repair) preceding the size designation. Example: spare. Failure to do so could result in spare the original equipment tire and reinstall on T145/80D18 103M. tire failure and loss of vehicle control. the vehicle at the first opportunity. T,S=Temporary Spare Tire Full Size Spare — If Equipped WARNING! Since this tire has limited tread life, the The full size spare is for temporary emer- original equipment tire should be repaired (or Limited use spares are for emergency use gency use only. This tire may look like the replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at only. Installation of this limited use spare originally equipped tire on the front or rear the first opportunity. tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare do not drive more than the speed listed on Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to tire may have limited tread life. When the the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated mount a conventional tire on the compact tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on spare wheel, since the wheel is designed temporary use full size spare tire needs to be your Tire and Loading Information Placard specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not replaced. Since it is not the same as your located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the install more than one compact spare tire and original equipment tire, replace (or repair) rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace wheel on the vehicle at any given time. the original equipment tire and reinstall on (or repair) the original equipment tire at the vehicle at the first opportunity. the first opportunity and reinstall it on your WARNING! vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss Limited Use Spare — If Equipped of vehicle control. Compact and collapsible spares are for The limited use spare tire is for temporary temporary emergency use only. With these Wheel And Wheel TrimCare spares, do not drive more than 50 mph emergency use only. This tire is identified by (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim- a label located on the limited use spare All wheels and wheel trim, especially alumi- wheel. This label contains the driving limita- ited tread life. When the tread is worn to num and chrome plated wheels, should be tions for this spare. This tire may look like the the tread wear indicators, the temporary use cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) original equipped tire on the front or rear axle spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to soap and water to maintain their luster and to of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of follow the warnings, which apply to your prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the this limited use spare tire affects vehicle 201 same soap solution recommended for the When cleaning extremely dirty wheels includ- NOTE: body of the vehicle and remember to always ing excessive brake dust, care must be taken If you intend parking or storing your vehicle wash when the surfaces are not hot to the in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning for an extended period after cleaning the touch. chemicals and equipment to prevent damage wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or droplets from the brake components. This caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is activity will remove the red rust on the brake chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other recommended or select a non-abrasive, non- rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when road chemicals used to melt ice or control acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome braking. dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge wheels. and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They CAUTION! Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels can damage the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a CAUTION! tarnishing. bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the If your vehicle is equipped with these CAUTION! wheel's protective finish. Such damage is specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel not covered by the New Vehicle Limited cleaners, abrasives, or polishing com- SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Avoid products or automatic car washes Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar pounds. They will permanently damage that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom- this finish and such damage is not covered additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermar- mended. by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ket wheel cleaners and automatic car HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP washes may damage the wheel's protective AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used finish. Such damage is not covered by the on a regular basis; this is all that is re- New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car quired to maintain this finish. wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

202 Tire Chains (Traction Devices) CAUTION! CAUTION! Use of traction devices require sufficient tire- To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, ating speed of the device manufacturer’s to-body clearance. Follow these recommen- if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). dations to guard against damage. observe the following precautions: • Because of restricted traction device • Do not use traction devices on a com- • Traction device must be of proper size for clearance between tires and other sus- pact spare tire. the tire, as recommended by the traction pension components, it is important that device manufacturer. only traction devices in good condition Tire Rotation Recommendations • Install on Rear Tires Only. are used. Broken devices can cause se- The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle rious damage. Stop the vehicle immedi- • P225/75R16 or a P235/65R17 tire with operate at different loads and perform differ- ately if noise occurs that could indicate the use of a traction device that meets the ent steering, handling, and braking func- device breakage. Remove the damaged SAE type “Class S” specification is tions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal parts of the device before further use. recommended. rates. • Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile These effects can be reduced by timely rota- WARNING! (0.8 km). tion of tires. The benefits of rotation are • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). Using tires of different size and type (M+S, especially worthwhile with aggressive tread • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns Snow) between front and rear axles can designs such as those on On/Off Road type and large bumps, especially with a cause unpredictable handling. You could tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to lose control and have a collision. loaded vehicle. maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, • Do not drive for a prolonged period on and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. dry pavement. • Observe the traction device manufactur- Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the er’s instructions on the method of instal- proper maintenance intervals. The reasons lation, operating speed, and conditions for any rapid or unusual wear should be for use. Always use the suggested oper- corrected prior to rotation being performed.

203 The suggested rotation method is the DEPARTMENT OF For example, a tire graded 150 would “rearward-cross” shown in the following wear one and one-half times as well on diagram. TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires GRADES depends upon the actual conditions of The following tire grading categories their use, however, and may depart were established by the National High- significantly from the norm due to way Traffic Safety Administration. The variations in driving habits, service specific grade rating assigned by the practices, and differences in road Tire Rotation tire's manufacturer in each category is characteristics and climate. CAUTION! shown on the sidewall of the tires on Traction Grades your vehicle. Proper operation of four-wheel drive ve- The Traction grades, from highest to hicles depends on tires of equal size, type All passenger vehicle tires must con- lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These and circumference on each wheel. Any form to Federal safety requirements in grades represent the tire's ability to SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE difference in tire size can cause damage to addition to these grades. stop on wet pavement, as measured the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear. Treadwear under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of as- The Treadwear grade is a comparative phalt and concrete. A tire marked C rating, based on the wear rate of the may have poor traction performance. tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

204 WARNING! The grade C corresponds to a level of INTERIORS performance, which all passenger ve- The traction grade assigned to this hicle tires must meet under the Fed- Seats And Fabric Parts tire is based on straight-ahead brak- eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol- ing traction tests, and does not in- No. 109. Grades B and A represent stery and carpeting. clude acceleration, cornering, hy- higher levels of performance on the droplaning, or peak traction laboratory test wheel, than the mini- WARNING! characteristics. mum required by law. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, Temperature Grades WARNING! and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. The Temperature grades are A (the The temperature grade for this tire is highest), B, and C, representing the established for a tire that is properly Seat Belt Maintenance tire's resistance to the generation of inflated and not overloaded. Exces- Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with heat and its ability to dissipate heat, sive speed, under-inflation, or ex- chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This when tested under controlled condi- cessive loading, either separately or tions on a specified indoor laboratory will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also in combination, can cause heat weaken the fabric. test wheel. buildup and possible tire failure. If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap Sustained high temperature can cause solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the material of the tire to degenerate the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry and reduce tire life, and excessive with a soft cloth. temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

205 Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive WARNING! CAUTION! and damage the leather upholstery and A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a • Damage caused by these type of prod- should be removed promptly with a damp collision and leave you with no protection. ucts may not be covered by your New cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily Inspect the belt system periodically, Vehicle Limited Warranty. with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. should be taken to avoid soaking your leather Damaged parts must be replaced immedi- Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use ately. Do not disassemble or modify the The lenses in front of the instruments in this polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, de- system. Seat belt assemblies must be re- vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When tergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to placed after a collision if they have been cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to clean your leather upholstery. Application of damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web- avoid scratching the plastic. a leather conditioner is not required to main- bing, etc.). tain the original condition. 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap Plastic And Coated Parts solution may be used, but do not use high NOTE: alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If If equipped with light colored leather, it Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl soap is used, wipe clean with a clean tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and upholstery. damp cloth. fabric dye transfer more so than darker col-

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning, 2. Dry with a soft cloth. CAUTION! and FCA recommends Mopar total care Leather Parts leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the • Direct contact of air fresheners, insect leather seats as needed. repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani- Mopar Total Clean is specifically recom- tizers to the plastic, painted, or deco- mended for leather upholstery. rated surfaces of the interior may cause Your leather upholstery can be best preserved permanent damage. Wipe away immedi- by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. ately.

206 CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result.

Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

207 208 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION FUELREQUIREMENTS...... 211 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .....212 NUMBER ...... 210 3.6L Engine ...... 211 Engine ...... 212 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Materials Added To Fuel ...... 211 Chassis ...... 213 SPECIFICATIONS ...... 210 FLUIDCAPACITIES...... 212 MOPARACCESSORIES...... 214 Torque Specifications...... 210 Authentic Accessories And Jeep Performance Parts By Mopar ...... 214

209 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE NUMBER SPECIFICATIONS The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to found on the left front corner of the instru- ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to ment panel pad, visible from outside of the the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been re- vehicle through the windshield. This number moved and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug also appears underbody, on the right side of nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly the frame rail near the center of the vehicle, calibrated torque wrench using a high quality as well as on the Automobile Information six sided (hex) deep wall socket. Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your Torque Specifications vehicle. Save this label for a convenient re- Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/Bolt Lug Nut/Bolt cord of your vehicle identification number Torque Size Socket Size and optional equipment. 100 Ft-Lbs Vehicle Identification Number 1/2”x20 19mm TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS The VIN is also stamped on either right or left (135 N·m) hand side of the engine block. NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate. **Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

210 Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern FUEL REQUIREMENTS Poor quality gasoline can cause problems until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita- Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the 3.6L Engine tions. If you experience these symptoms, try lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway). another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. This engine is designed RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING (R+M)/2 METHOD to meet all emissions Materials Added ToFuel regulations and provide excellent fuel economy Designated TOP TIER 87 and performance when Detergent Gasoline using high-quality un- contains a higher level leaded “Regular” gaso- of detergents to further line having an octane aide in minimizing en- rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/ Torque Patterns gine and fuel system 2 method. The use of higher octane “Pre- deposits. When avail- After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/ mium” gasoline will not provide any benefit able, the usage of Top bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/ over “Regular” gasoline in these engines. bolts are properly seated against the wheel. Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. While operating on gasoline with an octane Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP WARNING! number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. from the engine is not a cause for concern. Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off However, if the engine is heard making a agents should be avoided. Many of these the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme- materials intended for gum and varnish re- until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num- moval may contain active solvents or similar to follow this warning may result in per- ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure ingredients. These can harm fuel system gas- sonal injury. and may void or not be covered by the New ket and diaphragm materials. Vehicle Limited Warranty.

211 FLUID CAPACITIES U.S. Metric Fuel (Approximate) Two Door Models 18.6 Gallons 70 Liters Four Door Models 22.5 Gallons 85 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3.6L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters Cooling System * 3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10.5 Quarts 9.9 Liters 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) * Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Engine Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent. Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs. Fuel Selection 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.

212 CAUTION! CAUTION! CAUTION! tirust products, as they may not be com- • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine patible with the radiator engine coolant other than specified Organic Additive coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into and may plug the radiator. Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti- the cooling system in an emergency, the freeze), may result in engine damage cooling system will need to be drained, • This vehicle has not been designed for and may decrease corrosion protection. flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT cool- use with propylene glycol-based engine Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en- ant (conforming to MS.90032), by an coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene gine coolant is different and should not authorized dealer as soon as possible. glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based is not recommended. Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti- engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do freeze) or any “globally compatible” not use additional rust inhibitors or an-

Chassis Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission – Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of If Equipped your transmission. We recommend Mopar ATF+4 fluid. Manual Transmission – We recommend you use Mopar Manual Transmission Lubricant meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard If Equipped MS-9224. Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5). Axle Differential (Rear) 226 RBI (Model 44) – We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5) or equivalent. For trailer towing, use Mopar Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W-140). Models equipped with Trac-Lok require an additive. Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4, Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.

213 MOPAR ACCESSORIES Choose these products with confidence NOTE: knowing that they have passed the same All parts are subject to availability. Authentic Accessories And Jeep rigid standards for function, fit, durability and performance as your Wrangler. Performance Parts By Mopar • For the full line of Authentic Jeep Accesso- • Mopar Accessories and Jeep performance ries by Mopar, visit your local dealership or parts are developed with the same engi- online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and neering that went into your Wrangler. mopar.ca for Canadian residents. Chrome: • Grille • Tubular Side Steps • Tubular Bumpers • Exhaust Tip • Fuel Door • Tail Lamp Guards

Off Road & Performance: • Bumpers • Rock Rails • Skid Plates • Winches • Lift Kits • Lights TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS • Performance Axles • LED Lights • Tow Hooks • Cold Air Intake • Differential Covers

Exterior: • Black Tubular Side Steps • Satin Fuel Door • Air Deflectors • Satin Black Grille • Cab Covers • Wheels • Spare Tire Covers • Soft & Hard Tops • Splash Guards • Wheel Locks • Hood Decals • Fender Flares • Locking Fuel Cap • Ski And Bike Carriers • Trailer Hitches • Hood (2 Styles Of Performance Hoods)

214 Interior: • Lockable Storage • All Weather Floor Mats • Cargo Area Tray • Hard Top Headliner • Carpet Floor Mats • Grab Handles • Custom Premium Leather Seats • Seat Covers

Electronics: • Electronic Vehicle Tracking System • Remote Start • Heated Washer Solvent

215 216 MULTIMEDIA

MULTIMEDIA RADIO130...... 218 Audio Jack Operation ...... 230 UCONNECT PHONE...... 242 Clock Setting...... 219 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Operation . . . .230 Phone Pairing ...... 242 Equalizer, Balance And Fade ...... 219 Cleaning Your Touchscreen Radio . . . .233 Phonebook ...... 243 Radio Operation ...... 219 Garmin Navigation ...... 233 Making A Phone Call ...... 244 CD/DISC Operation ...... 219 Main Navigation Menu ...... 234 Receiving A Call — Accept (And End). .244 Audio Jack Operation ...... 220 Following Your Route ...... 235 Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call ...... 244 RADIO 130 WITH SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO/ SATELLITE RADIO ...... 221 TRAVELLINK...... 235 Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And Vehicle ...... 244 Clock Setting...... 222 CYBERSECURITY...... 239 Changing The Volume ...... 244 Equalizer, Balance And Fade ...... 222 TIPS CONTROLS AND General Information...... 245 Radio Operation ...... 222 GENERAL INFORMATION .....240 UCONNECT VOICE CD/DISC Operation ...... 223 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...... 240 COMMAND ...... 245 Audio Jack Operation ...... 223 Reception Conditions...... 240 Voice Command Operation...... 245 UCONNECT 430/430N ...... 224 Care And Maintenance ...... 240 Voice Text Reply ...... 248 Clock Setting...... 225 Anti-Theft Protection ...... 240 BLUETOOTH STREAMING Menu ...... 225 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — AUDIO...... 248 Equalizer, Balance And Fade ...... 225 IFEQUIPPED...... 241 Radio Operation ...... 227 CD/DVD Disc Operation ...... 229

217 RADIO 130 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 130 1 — CD Eject Button 9 — Set Clock Button 2 — SEEK Down Button 10 — Audio Settings/Rotate To Tune 3 — SEEK Up Button 11 — Radio Sales Code 4 — AM/FM Button 12 — Audio Jack 5 — DISC Mode Button 13 — Set Preset/CD Random Play 6 — AUX Mode Button 14 — Station Presets Buttons 7 — Rewind Button 15 — ON/OFF/Rotate For Volume 8 — Fast Forward Button

218 NOTE: Equalizer, Balance And Fade • A second station may be added to each push button. Push the SET/RND or SET • Your radio has many features that add to 1. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and (depending on the radio) button twice and the comfort and convenience for you and “BASS” will display. SET 2 will show in the display. Then select your passengers. 2. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to a preset button (1–6). • Some of these radio features should not be select the desired setting. used when driving because they take your CD/DISC Operation eyes from the road or your attention from 3. Continue pushing the TUNE/SCROLL Seek Up/Down Buttons driving. control knob to display and set “MID RANGE,” “TREBLE,” “BALANCE” and • Push to seek through CD tracks. Clock Setting “FADE.” • Hold either button to bypass tracks without 1. Push and hold the TIME button until the stopping. hours blink. Radio Operation SET/RND Or RND (Depending On Radio) Button 2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to Seek Up/Down Buttons (Random Play) set the hours. • Push the seek up or down button to seek • Push this button while the CD is playing to 3. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob un- through radio stations in AM or FM bands. activate Random Play. til the minutes begin to blink. • Hold either button to bypass stations with- • This feature plays the selections on the CD 4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to out stopping. in random order to provide an interesting set the minutes. change of pace. Store Radio Presets Manually 5. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to • Tune to the desired station. save the changes. 6. Push any button/knob or wait five seconds • Push the SET/RND or SET (depending on to exit. the radio) button once and SET 1 will show in the display. Then select a preset button (1–6).

219 Audio Jack Operation The AUX/Audio Jack provides a means to connect a portable audio device, such as an MP3 player or an iPod, to the vehicle’s sound system. This requires the use of a 3.5 mm stereo audio patch cable. MULTIMEDIA Pushing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the Audio Jack is connected, allowing the music from your portable device to play through the vehicle's speakers. The functions of the portable device are controlled using the device buttons, not the buttons on the radio. However, the volume may be controlled using the radio or portable device.

220 RADIO 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO

Uconnect 130 With SiriusXM Satellite Radio 1 — CD Eject Button 12 — Audio Jack 2 — SEEK Down Button 13 — Set Preset/CD Random Play 3 — SEEK Up Button 14 — Station Preset Buttons 4 — Voice Command Button 15 — ON/OFF/Rotate For Volume 5 — Uconnect Phone Button 16 — AM/FM Mode Button 6 — Station Info Button 17 — List Folders On A CD 7 — Rewind Button 18 — Satellite Radio Button 8 — Fast Forward Button 19 — Music Type Button 9 — Set Clock Button 20 — DISC Mode Button 10 — Audio Settings/Rotate To Tune 21 — Set Up Function Button 11 — Radio Sales Code

221 NOTE: 5. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to Store Radio Presets Manually save the changes. • Your radio may not be equipped with the • Tune to the desired station. Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect 6. Push any button/knob or wait five seconds • Push the SET/RND or SET (depending on Phone features. To determine if your radio to exit. the radio) button once and SET 1 will show has these features, push the Voice Com- Equalizer, Balance And Fade in the display. Then select a preset button mand button on the radio. You will hear a (1–6).

MULTIMEDIA voice prompt if you have the feature, or see 1. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and • A second station may be added to each a message on the radio stating “Uconnect “BASS” will display. push button. Push the SET/RND or SET Phone not available” if you do not. 2. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to (depending on the radio) button twice and • Your radio has many features that add to select the desired setting. SET 2 will show in the display. Then select the comfort and convenience of you and 3. Continue pushing the TUNE/SCROLL a preset button (1–6). your passengers. Some of these radio fea- control knob to display and set “MID Music Type tures should not be used when driving be- RANGE,” “TREBLE,” “BALANCE” and cause they take your eyes from the road or “FADE.” NOTE: your attention from driving. The Music Type function only operates when Radio Operation in FM mode. Clock Setting Seek Up/Down Buttons • Push the MUSIC TYPE button to activate 1. Push and hold the TIME button until the this mode. Push the MUSIC TYPE button • Push the seek up or down button to seek hours blink. again or turn the TUNE/SCROLL control through radio stations in AM, FM, or SAT knob to select the desired music type 2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to bands. (Adult Hits, Country, Jazz, Oldies, Rock, set the hours. • Hold either button to bypass stations with- etc.). out stopping. 3. Push the TUNE/SCROLL control knob un- • When a music type is chosen and the Music til the minutes begin to blink. type is displayed, push either SEEK button 4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to and the radio will only search for stations set the minutes. with the selected music type. 222 SETUP Button SET/RND Or RND (Depending On Radio) Button Audio Jack Operation (Random Play) • Pushing the SETUP button allows you to The AUX/Audio Jack provides a means to select between items that are available in • Push this button while the CD is playing to connect a portable audio device, such as an that particular mode. activate random play. MP3 player or an iPod, to the vehicle’s sound • Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to • This feature plays the selections on the CD system. This requires the use of a 3.5 mm scroll through the entries. Push the AUDIO/ in random order to provide an interesting stereo audio patch cable. SELECT button to select an entry and make change of pace. Pushing the AUX button will change the changes. LIST Button mode to auxiliary device if the Audio Jack is connected, allowing the music from your por- CD/DISC Operation • Push the LIST button to bring up a list of all table device to play through the vehicle's Seek Up/Down Buttons folders on the CD. Scroll up or down the list by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. speakers. • Push to seek through CD tracks. • To select a folder from the list, push the The functions of the portable device are con- • Hold either button to bypass tracks without TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the radio trolled using the device buttons, not the but- stopping. will begin playing the files contained in that tons on the radio. However, the volume may folder. be controlled using the radio or portable device.

223 UCONNECT 430/430N MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 430/430N 1 — Voice Command Button 7 — Audio Jack 2 — Open/Close Display 8 — Radio Sales Code 3 — MENU Button 9 — ON/OFF/Rotate For Volume 4 — AUDIO Settings Button 10 — Select MEDIA Mode Button 5 — Internal Hard Drive Button 11 — RADIO Mode Button 6 — USB Port 12 — Uconnect Phone Button

224 NOTE: Clock Setting Equalizer, Balance And Fade • Your radio may not be equipped with the 1. Turn the radio on, then press the screen Audio Control Menu Uconnect Voice Command and Uconnect where the time is displayed. Phone features. To determine if your radio has these features, push the Voice Com- 2. Press the “User Clock” button on the mand button on the radio. You will hear a touchscreen or the time display (Naviga- voice prompt if you have the feature, or see tion radio only). a message on the radio stating “Uconnect 3. To adjust the hours, press either the “Hour Phone not available” if you do not. Forward” or “Hour Backward” button on • Your radio has many features that add to the touchscreen. the comfort and convenience of you and Audio Control Menu your passengers. Some of these radio fea- 4. To adjust the minutes, press either the tures should not be used when driving be- “Minute Forward” or “Minute Backward” • Push the AUDIO button on the faceplate on cause they take your eyes from the road or button on the touchscreen. the right side of the radio. your attention from driving. 5. To save the new time setting, press the • Use either the “arrow” buttons on the screen where the word “Save” is touchscreen or the sliders to adjust BASS, displayed. MID, and/or TREBLE. Menu • Press the “BAL/FADE” button on the touchscreen and use either the “arrow” buttons • Push the MENU button on the faceplate to on the touchscreen or the cross-hair to access the System Setup menu and the My change Balance and Fade. The “Center” Files menu. button on the touchscreen resets the settings. • Push the MENU button on the faceplate in an active mode (SAT, CD, AUX, etc.) to change mode specific settings.

225 Display Settings • Push the MENU button on the faceplate • Select the “Auto Color Mode” button on the and press the “Display Settings” button on touchscreen to switch to automatic the touchscreen to access the Display Set- daytime/nighttime mode and to control the tings menu. brightness of the display using the dimmer • Select the “Daytime Colors” button on the switch of the vehicle. touchscreen to switch to manual daytime • Press the “Exit” button on the touchscreen

MULTIMEDIA mode and to adjust the brightness of the to save your settings. display using daytime colors. Display Settings • Select the “Nighttime Colors” button on the touchscreen to switch to manual nighttime mode and to adjust the brightness of the display using nighttime colors.

226 Radio Operation

Radio Operation 1 — Radio Tuner Tabs 6 — Station Scan 2 — Individual Presets 7 — Seek Down 3 — Search/Browse 8 — Direct Tune 4 — Radio Station/Track Info 9 — Seek Up 5 — Sort Presets

227 • To access Radio Mode, push the RADIO Store Radio Presets Manually • Once the desired station is found, press button on the left side of the faceplate, and hold one of the “PRESETS” buttons on • Select the radio band by pressing either the then press the “AM,” “FM” or “SAT” but- the touchscreen in the list to the right, until “AM,” “FM,” or “SAT” button on the touch- ton on the touchscreen to select the band. the preset key flashes and the station text screen. Seek Up/Seek Down on the button on the touchscreen changes. • Find the station to store by either pressing • Press the “SEEK UP” or “SEEK DOWN” the “SEEK UP” or “SEEK DOWN” buttons NOTE: MULTIMEDIA buttons on the touchscreen to seek through on the touchscreen, pressing the “Scan” If the Presets are not visible on the right side radio stations in AM, FM, or SAT bands. button on the touchscreen, or by using the of the screen, press the “PRESETS” button Hold either seek button to bypass stations “Direct Tune” button on the touchscreen. on the touchscreen. without stopping.

228 CD/DVD Disc Operation

CD/DVD Disc Operation 1 — Media Source Tabs 6 — Track Scan 2 — Folder/Track 7 — Seek Down 3 — Open Folder 8 — Play/Pause 4 — Track Information 9 — Seek Up 5 — Sort Tracks

229 • Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate to Seek Up/Seek Down • Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate display the media source tabs at the top of then the “AUX” button on the touchscreen • Push the SEEK UP or SEEK DOWN buttons the screen. Select the source by pressing to change the mode to auxiliary device if on the faceplate to seek through tracks in the “HDD,” “DISC” or “AUX” media source the Audio Jack is connected, allowing the Disc Mode. Holding the SEEK UP button on button on the touchscreen. music from your portable device to play the touchscreen will fast forward through through the vehicle's speakers. NOTE: the track until the beginning of the track is

MULTIMEDIA Your Touchscreen Radio will usually auto- reached; if still held it will fast-forward NOTE: matically switch to the appropriate mode through the next sequential track(s) (if ran- The functions of the portable device are con- when something is first connected or inserted dom play mode is not active) until released. trolled using the device itself, not the buttons into the system. Holding the SEEK DOWN button on the on the radio. However, the volume may be Insert A CD/DVD Disc touchscreen will fast-reverse through the controlled using the radio or portable device. track until the beginning of the track is • To insert a disc, push the LOAD button on reached; if still held it will fast-reverse Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Operation the faceplate. through the next sequential track(s) (if ran- • The Hard Disk Drive (HDD) mode gives you • With the printed side upwards, insert the dom play mode is not active) until released. access to the audio files on the internal disc into the disc slot of the radio. The radio pulls the disc in automatically and closes Audio Jack Operation hard disk drive. It functions similar to a CD the flip screen. The radio selects the appro- player, with the exception that the internal The AUX/Audio Jack provides a means to priate mode after the disc is recognized, HDD can hold more tracks. connect a portable audio device, such as an and starts playing the first track. The dis- • It is also possible to import display pictures MP3 player or an iPod, to the vehicle’s sound play shows “Reading...” during this to the internal hard disk drive. The pictures system. This requires the use of a 3.5 mm process. can be displayed on the right half of the stereo audio patch cable. radio screen.

230 • Before using the HDD mode, you will need to • Press the “Add Music Files to HDD” button copy songs and pictures to the internal hard on the touchscreen, then press the “Front drive. Songs and pictures can be added to the USB” button on the touchscreen in the next hard drive by using a CD or USB device (e.g. screen. thumb drive or memory stick).

NOTE: • HDD supports only .jpg/JPEG formats for photos. Copying Music From CD • WMA/MP3 Files and selective songs from a CD can also be added to the HDD. See the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for NOTE: Copying Music From USB more information. • You might need to select the folder or title • Select the folders or titles you would like to Copying Music From CD depending on the CD, then push “DONE” to start the copy process. copy, then press the “SAVE” button on the • Push the LOAD button on the faceplate. touchscreen to start the copy process. • The copy progress is shown in the lower left • Insert a disc, then push the MY FILES corner of the screen. • To copy all of the titles, press the “ALL” button on the faceplate. Select the “MY button on the touchscreen then press the MUSIC” button on the touchscreen. Copying Music From USB “SAVE” button on the touchscreen. • Press the “Add Music Files to HDD” button • The USB port on the radio face plate allows NOTE: on the touchscreen, then press the “Disc” you to copy files to your hard drive. To The copy progress is shown in the lower left button on the touchscreen in the next access, lift up on the cover. corner of the screen. screen to start the process. • Insert a USB device (e.g. thumb drive or memory stick), then select the “MY MU- SIC” button on the touchscreen.

231 Copying Pictures To The HDD Display A Picture On The Radio Screen • Insert either a CD or a USB device contain- • Once the import is complete, the pictures ing your pictures in JPEG format. will then be available in the “MY PIC- TURES” screen. • Push the MY FILES button on the faceplate. • Push the MY FILES button on the faceplate, then press the “My Pictures” button

MULTIMEDIA • Press the “My Pictures” button on the on the touchscreen. Press the desired pic- touchscreen to get an overview of the cur- ture, press the “Set as Picture View” button Copying Pictures To The HDD rently stored images, then press the “Add” on the touchscreen and then press the button on the touchscreen. “Exit” button on the touchscreen. Lastly • Press the “Disc” or “USB” button on the push the MENU button on the faceplate NOTE: touchscreen, then select the folders or pic- and press the “Picture View” button on the The copy progress is shown in the lower left tures you wish to copy to the HDD. Use the touchscreen to display the chosen picture corner of the screen. “PAGE” buttons on the touchscreen to on the radio screen. page through the list of pictures. NOTE: • Press the desired pictures or press the “All” • A check mark in the My Pictures screen button on the touchscreen for all pictures. indicates the currently used picture. Confirm your selections by pressing the • You can also delete pictures by pressing the “SAVE” button on the touchscreen. “Delete” button on the touchscreen.

232 Playing Music From The HDD Garmin Navigation • Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate to • Uconnect 430N integrates Garmin’s display the media source tabs at the top of consumer-friendly navigation into your ve- the screen. Press the “HDD” button on the hicle. Garmin Navigation includes a data- touchscreen. Press the desired track button base with over six million points of interest. on the touchscreen to play or press the • Press the “NAV” button in the upper right “SEARCH/BROWSE” button on the touch- corner of the touchscreen to access the screen to search by artist, by album, by Browsing Music From The HDD Navigation system. song, by genre, from a folder, or from Favorites.

Cleaning YourTouchscreen Radio • If necessary, use a dry micro fiber lens cleaning cloth dampened with a cleaning solution such as isopropyl alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Always follow the solvent manufac- Garmin Navigation turer's precautions and directions. Playing Music From The HDD CAUTION! Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume 1. Program a destination. Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the screen. Use a clean 2. While traveling on your route, press the and dry micro fiber lens cleaning cloth to upper left area of the map screen where clean the touchscreen. your next turn is displayed. 3. The navigation system will then repeat the distance to your next turn. 233 4. While the navigation system is speaking, • Select a category, then a subcategory, if Setting Your Home Location necessary. use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to • From the main navigation menu, press the adjust the volume to a comfortable level. • Select your destination and press the “Go” "Tools" icon. Select the "My Data" folder Please note the volume setting for Navi- button on the touchscreen. icon, and then select "Set Home Location." gation Voice Prompt is different than the Finding A Place By Spelling The Name • You may enter your address directly, use audio system. your current location as your home address, • From the main navigation menu, press the MULTIMEDIA or choose from recently found locations. NOTE: “Where To?” button on the touchscreen. For your own safety and the safety of others, it Next, press the “Points of Interest” button Edit Home Location is not possible to use certain features while on the touchscreen then press the “Spell • From the main Navigation menu press the the vehicle is in motion. Name” button on the touchscreen. “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, Main Navigation Menu • Enter the name of your destination. then press the "Tools" icon. Next, press the • Press the “Done” button on the touch- "My Data" folder. Finding Points Of Interest screen. • You may enter a new address directly, use • From the main Navigation menu, press the • Select your destination and press the “Go” your current location or choose from re- “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, button on the touchscreen. cently found locations. then press the “Points of Interest” button Go Home on the touchscreen. Entering A Destination Address • From the main navigation menu, press the • A Home location must be saved in the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, system. From the Main Navigation menu, then press the “Address” button on the press the “Where To?” button on the touch- touchscreen. screen, then press the “Go Home” button on the touchscreen. • Follow the on-screen prompts to enter the address, then press the “Go” button on the touchscreen.

Main Navigation Menu 234 Following YourRoute Adding A Via Point NOTE: If the route you are currently taking is the only Your route is marked with a magenta line on To add a stop between the current location reasonable option, the device might not cal- the map. If you depart from the original route, and the end destination (Via Point), you must culate a detour. your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon be navigating a route. could appear as you travel on major roadways. • Press the “back arrow” icon multiple times Acquiring Satellites to return to the main navigation menu. The GPS Satellite strength bars indicate the • Press the “Where To?” button on the touch- strength of your satellite reception. screen, then search for the additional stop. • Acquiring satellite signals can take a few Select the destination you wish to add from minutes. When at least one of the bars is the given search results. green, your device has acquired satellite • Press the “Go” button on the touchscreen, signals. then press "Add as a Via Point" button on • You may experience delays receiving satel- the touchscreen and press the "Done" but- lite signals when in areas with an ob- ton on the touchscreen. structed view to the sky, such as garages, Following Your Route Taking A Detour tunnels, or large cities with tall buildings. 1 — Distance To Next Turn 2 — Current Location To take a detour, you must be navigating a SIRIUSXM SATELLITE 3 — Zoom In route. 4 — Zoom Out RADIO/TRAVEL LINK • Press the “back arrow” icon button on the 5 — Current Speed touchscreen multiple times to return to the • SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscrip- 6 — Drag Map For Different View tion, sold separately after the five (5) year 7 — Your Location On The Map main navigation menu. trial subscription included with your ve- 8 — Estimated Time Of Arrival • Press the “Detour” button on the hicle purchase. 9 — Navigation Main Menu touchscreen. • SiriusXM Travel Link is only available in the United States. 235 • The following describes features that are Search/Browse SiriusXM Satellite Radio Favorites available when in SiriusXM Satellite Radio • Press the “magnifying glass” button on the (SAT Favorites) mode. touchscreen to search/browse the SiriusXM • You can save 50 favorite songs and 50 fa- • To access SiriusXM Satellite Radio, push channel listing by Favorites and Categories vorite artists. the RADIO/MEDIA or RADIO button on the such as Song, Artist and Channel Name. faceplate, then press the “SAT” button on The Search/Browse also allows you to man- the touchscreen. age your Favorites. MULTIMEDIA Info • Press the “i” button on the touchscreen to view detailed information about the current Sirius XM Satellite channel. SiriusXM Parental Controls Manage SAT Favorites

• SiriusXM offers the option to permanently • Press the “Add Favorite” button on the block selected channels. Call SAT Browse touchscreen to add either the song or the 1-888-539-7474 and request the Family artist of the currently playing program to Package. the SAT Favorites list. The favorite star will • Uconnect 430/430N: Push the “MENU” appear in the upper right corner, below the button on the faceplate while in SiriusXM “SAT” button on the touchscreen. Satellite Radio Mode, then press the “Channel Lock” to enable and/or disable desired channels. The SEEK and SCAN function will then only display channels without Channel lock.

236 • You will see a favorite star indicator in the Display SAT Favorites List You may use the “LIST” button on the touch- upper right side of the screen below the • Press the “Search/Browse” button on the screen to toggle between: “SAT” button on the touchscreen and a pop touchscreen and select “Favorites” from • Favorite Songs up will alert you that a favorite song or artist the SAT Browse screen. is currently playing on one of the SiriusXM • Favorite Artists satellite radio channels. • Currently playing favorites

SAT Browse

Favorites Alert • Press the desired favorites button on the SAT Favorites touchscreen to switch the SAT tuner to the corresponding channel. NOTE: Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for more information.

237 Replay The time displayed below the bar indicates • While you are in SAT mode, you can replay how much time is present between the cur- 44 minutes of the current SiriusXM chan- rent buffer play position and the live broad- nel (when the channel is changed, this cast. audio buffer is erased). Push the REPLAY button to listen to the stored audio.

MULTIMEDIA • You can press the on-screen controls to pause and rewind audio playback, press the SAT Mode Replay SCAN button to preview each of the tracks stored in the buffer, or select a track from the list. Replay Option Option Description Play/Pause Press to pause content playback. Press Pause/Play again to resume playback. Rewind/RW Rewinds the channel content in steps of five seconds. Press and hold to rewind continuously, then release to begin playing content at that point. Fast Forward/FW Forwards the content, and works similarly to Rewind/RW. However, Fast Forward/FW can only be used when content has been previously rewound. Replay Time Displays the amount of time in the upper center of the screen by which your content lags the live channel. Live Resumes playback of live content at any time while replaying rewound content.

238 CYBERSECURITY • To help further improve vehicle security and WARNING! minimize the potential risk of a security Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and • It is not possible to know or to predict all breach, vehicle owners should: may be equipped with both wired and wire- of the possible outcomes if your vehi- – Routinely check less networks. These networks allow your ve- cle’s systems are breached. It may be www.driveuconnect.com/ hicle to send and receive information. This possible that vehicle systems, including support/software-update.html (U.S. information allows systems and features in safety related systems, could be im- Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca your vehicle to function properly. paired or a loss of vehicle control could (Canadian Residents) to learn about occur that may result in an accident available Uconnect software updates. Your vehicle may be equipped with certain – Only connect and use trusted media security features to reduce the risk of unau- involving serious injury or death. • ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, thorized and unlawful access to vehicle sys- or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a USBs, CDs). tems and wireless communications. Vehicle trusted source. Media of unknown origin software technology continues to evolve over Privacy of any wireless and wired communi- could possibly contain malicious soft- time and FCA US LLC, working with its sup- cations cannot be assured. Third parties may ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it unlawfully intercept information and private pliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps may increase the possibility for vehicle communications without your consent. For as needed. Similar to a computer or other systems to be breached. further information, refer to “Onboard Diag- devices, your vehicle may require software • As always, if you experience unusual nostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in updates to improve the usability and perfor- vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in mance of your systems or to reduce the po- your nearest authorized dealer immedi- your Owner’s Manual. tential risk of unauthorized and unlawful ac- ately. cess to your vehicle systems. NOTE: The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if • FCA or your dealer may contact you directly the most recent version of vehicle software regarding software updates. (such as Uconnect software) is installed.

239 TIPS CONTROLS AND Left Switch Care And Maintenance GENERAL INFORMATION • Push the switch up or down to search for Observe the following precautions to ensure the next listenable station or select the next the system is fully operational: Steering Wheel Audio Controls or previous CD track. • The display lens should not come into con- The steering wheel audio controls are located • Push the button in the center to select the tact with pointed or rigid objects which on the rear surface of the steering wheel. next preset station (radio) or to change CDs could damage its surface; use a soft, dry MULTIMEDIA if equipped with a CD Player. anti-static cloth to clean and do not press. Right Switch • Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to clean the display lens. • Push the switch up or down to increase or decrease the volume. • Prevent any liquid from entering the system: this could damage it beyond repair. • Push the button in the center to change modes AM/FM/CD/SXM. Anti-Theft Protection

Reception Conditions The system is equipped with an anti-theft protection system based on the exchange of Reception conditions change constantly information with the electronic control unit while driving. Reception may be interfered (Body Computer) on the vehicle. with by the presence of mountains, buildings This guarantees maximum safety and pre- or bridges, especially when you are far away vents the secret code from being entered Steering Wheel Audio Controls from the broadcaster. after the power supply has been discon- (Rearview Of Steering Wheel) The volume may be increased when receiving nected. traffic alerts and news.

240 If the check has a positive outcome, the system will start to operate, whereas if the comparison codes are not the same or if the electronic control unit (Body Computer) is replaced, the system will ask the user to enter the secret code. See an authorized dealer for further information. AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL — iPod/USB/MP3 IF EQUIPPED There are many ways to play music from When connected to this feature: iPod/MP3 players or USB devices through • The iPod can be controlled using the radio your vehicle's sound system. buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod Center Console USB The remote USB port, located within the or external devices contents. center console, allows you to plug an iPod • Non-Touchscreen Radios: To hear audio from • The iPod battery charges when plugged into into the vehicle's sound system. devices connected to the USB port, push the USB port (if supported by the specific the AUX button on the faceplate. audio device). • Touchscreen Radios: To hear audio from de- • Compatible iPod devices may also be con- vices connected to the USB port, push the trollable using voice commands. MEDIA button on the faceplate, then press the “AUX” or “iPod” button on the Refer to the Owner's Manual for further infor- touchscreen. mation.

241 NOTE: UCONNECT PHONE NOTE: The USB port supports certain Mini, Classic, The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile Nano, Touch, and iPhone devices. The USB The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, phone equipped with the Bluetooth port also supports playing music from compat- hands-free, in-vehicle communications sys- Hands-Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher. ible external USB Mass Storage Class memory tem with Voice Command Capability that al- For Uconnect Customer Support: devices. Refer to UconnectPhone.com for a lows you to dial a phone number with your U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com list of tested iPod’s. Some iPod software mobile phone using simple voice commands or call 1-877-855-8400. Canadian resi- MULTIMEDIA versions may not fully support the USB port (see Voice Command section). dents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call, features. Please visit Apple’s website for iPod 1-800-465-2001 (English) or • To determine if your vehicle is equipped software updates. 1-800-387-9983 (French). This site will with Uconnect Phone, push the “Uconnect provide specific instructions based on the Phone” button located on the radio type of mobile phone being paired. WARNING! faceplate. If your vehicle has this feature, Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external you will hear a voice prompt. If not, you will Phone Pairing device while driving. Failure to follow this see a message on the radio “Uconnect NOTE: warning could result in a collision. Phone not available.” Pairing is a one - time initial setup before NOTE: using the phone. Prior to starting the pairing To access the tutorial, push the “Uconnect procedure ensure all additional phones Phone” button . After the BEEP, say within the vehicle have their Bluetooth dis- “tutorial.” Push any button on the faceplate, abled. or press any button on the touchscreen, to 1. Activate Bluetooth on the mobile phone cancel the tutorial. you are pairing. • Refer to “Uconnect Phone” in “Multimedia” 2. Push the “Phone” button. in your Owner's Manual for further details. 3. Wait for the “ready” prompt and BEEP. 4. After the BEEP, say ”setup” or “Uconnect device setup.” 242 5. After the BEEP, say “device pairing.” • Next you will be asked to give this new Phonebook pairing a priority of 1 through 7 (up to seven phones may be paired); 1 is the highest and Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook 7 is the lowest priority. The system will only Transfer From Mobile Phone connect to the highest priority phone that If equipped and specifically supported by exists within the proximity of the vehicle. your phone, Uconnect Phone automatically • You will then need to start the pairing downloads names (text names) and number procedure on your cell phone. Follow the entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook. Bluetooth instructions in your cell phone Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Mobile Phone Pairing Owner's Manual to complete the phone Access Profile may support this feature. Au- pairing setup. tomatic Transfer is indicated by a green arrow 6. After the BEEP, say “pair a device.” at the bottom of the screen. See NOTE: UconnectPhone.com for supported phones. 7. Follow the audible prompts. Keep in mind that software updates – either • You will be asked to say a four-digit Per- on your phone or Uconnect system – may sonal Identification Number (PIN), which interfere with the Bluetooth connection. If you will later need to enter into your mobile this happens, simply repeat the pairing pro- phone. You can say any four-digit PIN. You cess. However, first, make sure to delete the will not need to remember this PIN after the device from the list of phones on your initial pairing process. Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your • You will then be prompted to give the phone phone’s Bluetooth settings. pairing a name (each phone paired should Uconnect myPHONE have a unique name). • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone. For example, after you start the vehicle. 243 NOTE: Making A Phone Call Changing The Volume The mobile phone may require authorization • Push the “Phone” button . • Start a dialogue by pushing the “Phone” prior to download. • After the BEEP, say “dial” (or “call” a button , then adjust the volume during • A maximum of 1,000 entries per phone will name). a normal call. be downloaded and updated every time a • Use the radio ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob phone is connected to the Uconnect • After the BEEP, say number (or name). to adjust the volume to a comfortable level MULTIMEDIA Phone. Receiving A Call — Accept (And End) while the Uconnect system is speaking. • Depending on the maximum number of Please note the volume setting for • When an incoming call rings/is announced entries downloaded, there may be a short Uconnect is different than the audio on Uconnect, push the “Phone” button delay before the latest downloaded names system. . can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- • To end a call, push the “Phone” button WARNING! able for use. . • Any voice commanded system should be • Only the phonebook of the currently con- Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During used only in safe driving conditions fol- nected mobile phone is accessible. Call lowing applicable laws regarding phone • Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is use. Your attention should be focused on • During a call, push the “Voice Command” downloaded. The SIM card phonebook is safely operating the vehicle. Failure to button . not part of the Mobile phonebook. do so may result in a collision causing • After the BEEP, say “mute” (or “mute off”). • This downloaded phonebook cannot be ed- you and others to be severely injured or killed. ited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset These can only be edited on the mobile • In an emergency, to use Uconnect And Vehicle Phone, your mobile phone must be: phone. The changes are transferred and • turned on updated to Uconnect Phone on the next • During a call, push the “Voice Command” • paired to Uconnect Phone phone connection. button . • have network coverage • After the BEEP, say “transfer call.” 244 General Information UCONNECT VOICE NOTE: U.S. residents visit driveuconnect.com for The following regulatory statement applies to COMMAND more info on which voice command features all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in apply to your vehicle. Canadian residents this vehicle: Voice Command Operation visit driveuconnect.ca for more info on which This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC The Uconnect Voice Command system allows voice command features apply to your ve- Rules and with Industry Canada license- you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite hicle. exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub- radio, disc player, HDD, Uconnect Phone, a • Start a dialogue by pushing the “Voice ject to the following two conditions: memo recorder, and supported portable me- Command” button , you will hear a dia devices. 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- beep. The beep is your signal to give a ference, and • When you push the “Voice Command” but- command. Below are a list of voice com- 2. This device must accept any interference ton located on the radio faceplate or mands for each of the different modes: received, including interference that may steering wheel, you will hear a beep. The cause undesired operation. beep is your signal to give a command. If you do not say a command within a few NOTE: seconds, the system presents you with a list Changes or modifications not expressly ap- of options. If you ever want to interrupt the proved by the party responsible for compli- system while it lists options, push the ance could void the user’s authority to oper- “Voice Command” button , listen for ate the equipment. the BEEP, and say your command.

245 While In: Voice Command Example: “Radio AM” (to switch to the AM radio mode) “Radio FM” (to switch to the FM radio mode) “Satellite Radio” (to switch to the Satellite radio mode) “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode) Main Menu “USB” (to switch to the USB mode) MULTIMEDIA “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to the Bluetooth Streaming mode) “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder) “System Setup” (to switch to system setup) “Frequency” (to change the frequency) “Next Station” (to select the next station) Radio Mode “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its spoken number) “Next Channel” (to select the next channel) “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel) “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels) SiriusXM Satellite Radio Mode "Channel Name" (to change the channel by its spoken name) “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel) “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)

246 While In: Voice Command Example: “Track” (#) (to change the track) “Next Track” (to play the next track) Disc Mode “Previous Track” (to play the previous track) “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” The following are common voice commands for this mode: “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the recording, you may push the Voice Command button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of the following commands: — “Save” (to save the memo) — “Continue” (to continue recording) — “Delete” (to delete the recording) — “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) — During the playback you may push the Memo Mode Voice Command button to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of the following commands: — “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) — “Next” (to play the next memo) — “Previous” (to play the previous memo) — “Delete” (to delete a memo) — “Delete All” (to delete all memos)

247 Voice TextReply WARNING! If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command, your Uconnect 430N radio may be able to Any voice commanded system should be play incoming Short Message Service (SMS) used only in safe driving conditions follow- messages (text messages) through the vehi- ing applicable laws regarding phone use. cle's sound system. It also allows you to Your attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may MULTIMEDIA respond by selecting from various predefined result in a collision causing you and others phrases. to be severely injured or killed. Bluetooth Streaming Audio NOTE: Non-Touchscreen Radios: Push the AUX but- Not all phones are compatible with this fea- BLUETOOTH STREAMING ture. Refer to the phone compatibility list at ton on the faceplate until "BT" or “Audio UconnectPhone.com. Connected mobile AUDIO Streaming” is displayed on the radio screen. phones must be bluetooth-compatible and If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command, Touchscreen-Radios: Push the RADIO/MEDIA paired with your radio. your Bluetooth-equipped iPod devices, cell or MEDIA button on the faceplate and then • Push the “Voice Command” button phones or other media players, may also be press the “AUX” button on the touchscreen. and after the BEEP, say “SMS” to get able to stream music to your vehicles speak- started. ers. Your connected device must be NOTE: Bluetooth-compatible, and paired with your To access the tutorial, push the “Voice Com- radio (see UconnectPhone.com for pairing mand” button . After the BEEP, say instructions). “tutorial.” Push any button on the faceplate or press any button on the touchscreen to cancel the tutorial.

248 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . .250 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . .252 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . .253 FCA US LLC Customer Center ...... 250 MOPARPARTS...... 252 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . .250 In Mexico Contact ...... 250 REPORTING SAFETY Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . .250 DEFECTS...... 252 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or In The 50 United States And Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)...... 251 Washington, D.C...... 252 Service Contract ...... 251 In Canada...... 252

249 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / the concern, you may contact the manufac- (800) 387-9983 French The manufacturer and its authorized dealer turer's customer center. are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We In Mexico Contact Any communication to the manufacturer's want you to be happy with our products and customer center should include the following Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 services. information: Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Warranty service must be done by an autho- • Owner's name and address rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you Mexico, D. F. • Owner's telephone number take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They In Mexico City: 5081-7568 know your vehicle the best, and are most (home and office) concerned that you get prompt and high • Authorized dealer name Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 quality service. The manufacturer's autho- • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE rized dealer have the facilities, factory- • Vehicle delivery date and mileage trained technicians, special tools, and the Customer Service Chrysler International latest information to ensure the vehicle is FCA US LLC Customer Center Services LLC fixed correctly and in a timely manner. P.O. Box 21–8004 P.O. Box 191857 This is why you should always talk to an Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 San Juan 00919-1857 authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. Phone: (877) 426-5337 Tel.: (888) 242-6342 • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center Fax: (787) 782-3345 talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you P.O. Box 1621 need assistance. Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

250 Customer Assistance For The Hearing The manufacturer stands behind only the We appreciate that you have made a major Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) manufacturer's service contracts. If you pur- investment when you purchased the vehicle. chased a manufacturer's service contract, An authorized dealer has also made a major To assist customers who have hearing diffi- you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner investment in facilities, tools, and training to culties, the manufacturer has installed spe- Identification Card in the mail within three assure that you are absolutely delighted with cial TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have the ownership experience. You will be Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any any questions about the service contract, call pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve hearing or speech impaired customer, who the manufacturer's Service Contract National any warranty issues or related concerns. has access to a TDD or a conventional tele- Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Ca- typewriter (TTY) in the United States, can nadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 Eng- WARNING! communicate with the manufacturer by dial- lish / (800) 387-9983 French). ing 1-800-380-CHRY. Engine exhaust (internal combustion en- The manufacturer will not stand behind any gines only), some of its constituents, and Canadian residents with hearing difficulties service contract that is not the manufactur- that require assistance can use the special certain vehicle components contain, or er's service contract. It is not responsible for emit, chemicals known to the State of needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. any service contract other than the manufac- California to cause cancer and birth de- For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for turer's service contract. If you purchased a fects, or other reproductive harm. In addi- Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to con- service contract that is not a manufacturer's tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles nect with a Bell Relay Service operator. service contract, and you require service after and certain products of component wear Service Contract the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited War- contain, or emit, chemicals known to the ranty expires, please refer to the contract State of California to cause cancer and You may have purchased a service contract documents, and contact the person listed in birth defects, or other reproductive harm. for a vehicle to help protect you from the high those documents. cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.

251 WARRANTY INFORMATION If NHTSA receives similar complaints, In Canada it may open an investigation, and if it See the Warranty Information Booklet for the If you believe that your vehicle has a terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warran- finds that a safety defect exists in a safety defect, you should contact the ties applicable to this vehicle and market. group of vehicles, it may order a recall Customer Service Department imme- and remedy campaign. However, diately. Canadian customers who wish MOPAR PARTS NHTSA cannot become involved in in- to report a safety defect to the Cana- Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories dividual problems between you, an au- dian government should contact are available from an authorized dealer. They thorized dealer or FCA US LLC. Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle De- are recommended for your vehicle in order to fect Investigations and Recalls at help keep the vehicle operating at its best. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http:// www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/. REPORTING SAFETY 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE DEFECTS 1-800-424-9153); or go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin- In The 50 United States And istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Av- Washington, D.C. enue, SE., West Building, If you believe that your vehicle has a Washington, D.C. 20590. You can defect that could cause a crash or also obtain other information about cause injury or death, you should im- motor vehicle safety from http:// mediately inform the National High- www.safercar.gov. way Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.

252 PUBLICATION ORDER NOTE: FORMS • The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic files are also available on the • You can purchase a copy of the Owner's Chrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or websites. Warranty Booklet. United States customers • Click on the “For Owners” tab, select may visit the Jeep Contact Us page at “Owner/Service Manuals”. Then select your www.jeep.com scroll to the bottom of the desired model year and vehicle from the page and select the “Contact Us” link, then drop down lists. select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove Compartment Material” from the left menu. You can also purchase a copy by calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada). • Replacement User Guide kits or, if you prefer, additional printed copies of the Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or Radio Manuals may be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com or by calling 1-877-890-4038 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada). Visa, Master Card, American Express and Discover or- ders are accepted.

253 254 INDEX

Accessories...... 214 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...... 70 Brake Control System, Electronic .....71 Mopar ...... 214 Anti-Lock Warning Light ...... 63 Brake Fluid ...... 177, 213 Adding Fuel ...... 140 Arming System (Security Alarm) ...... 19 Brake System ...... 177 Additives, Fuel...... 211 Assist, Hill Start...... 72 Fluid Check ...... 177 AirBag...... 96 Audio Jack ...... 220, 223, 230 Master Cylinder ...... 177 Advance Front Air Bag ...... 96 Audio Settings ...... 219, 222 Parking ...... 124 Air Bag Operation ...... 97 Automatic Headlights ...... 30 Warning Light ...... 60 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 95 Automatic Oil Change Indicator ...... 60 Brake/Transmission Interlock ...... 130 Enhanced Accident Response .101, 167 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . .37 Bulb Replacement ...... 148, 149 Bulbs, Light ...... 119, 148 Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...... 167 Automatic Transmission...... 130, 179 Front Air Bag ...... 96 Adding Fluid ...... 179 Capacities, Fluid ...... 212 If A Deployment Occurs ...... 100 Fluid And Filter Changes ...... 179 Caps, Filler Knee Impact Bolsters ...... 98 Fluid Change ...... 179 Fuel ...... 140 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . .101 Fluid Level Check ...... 178 Oil (Engine) ...... 175 Transporting Pets ...... 116 Fluid Type ...... 178, 213 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 117 Air Bag Light...... 60, 95, 117 Special Additives ...... 178 CD (Compact Disc) Player .....219, 223 Air Bag Maintenance ...... 101 Autostick ...... 131 Center High Mounted Stop Light .....151 Air Conditioner Maintenance ...... 180 Axle Fluid...... 213 Chains, Tire...... 203 Air Conditioning Filter...... 38, 181 Axle Lock ...... 135 Changing A Flat Tire ...... 156, 186 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ...... 37 Chart, Tire Sizing ...... 188 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . .180, 181 Battery ...... 61, 180 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . .116 Air Conditioning System ...... 37, 180 Charging System Light ...... 61 Checks, Safety...... 116 Air Pressure, Tires...... 196 Belts, Seat ...... 117 Child Restraint...... 102 Alarm (Security Alarm) ...... 19, 62 B-Pillar Location ...... 192 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...... 212 Brake Assist System ...... 71 255 Child Restraints Inspection ...... 176 Emergency, In Case Of Booster Seats ...... 105 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .212 Jacking ...... 156, 186 Child Restraints ...... 102 Customer Assistance ...... 250 Jump Starting ...... 160

INDEX Child Seat Installation ...... 114 Tow Hooks ...... 166 How To Stow An Unused ALR Daytime Running Lights ...... 30 Engine...... 175 Seat Belt ...... 112 Dealer Service ...... 183 Break-In Recommendations .....124 Infants And Child Restraints .....104 Defroster, Windshield...... 118 Compartment ...... 175 LATCH Positions ...... 107 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ...... 31 Compartment Identification ...... 175 Locating The LATCH Anchorages . .110 Diagnostic System, Onboard ...... 66 Coolant (Antifreeze) ...... 212 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...... 30 Cooling ...... 176 Children ...... 107 Dipsticks Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 117 Older Children And Child Oil (Engine) ...... 176 Fails To Start ...... 122 Restraints ...... 104 Disabled Vehicle Towing ...... 164 Flooded, Starting ...... 122 Seating Positions ...... 106 Disarming, Security System...... 19 Fuel Requirements ...... 212 Cleaning Doors ...... 20 Jump Starting ...... 160 Wheels ...... 201 Driver's Seat Back Tilt ...... 23 Oil...... 212 Climate Control ...... 33 Oil Change Interval ...... 60 Manual ...... 33 Electronic Brake Control System ...... 71 Oil Filler Cap ...... 175 Clock Setting...... 219, 222, 225 Anti-Lock Brake System ...... 70 Oil Selection ...... 212 Cold Weather Operation ...... 122 Electronic Roll Mitigation ...... 77 Overheating ...... 162 Compact Spare Tire ...... 200 Traction Control System ...... 73 Starting ...... 122 Connector Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Enhanced Accident Response UCI ...... 241 Control) ...... 137 Feature ...... 101, 167 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .241 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....73 Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 117 Contract, Service ...... 251 Electronic Throttle Control Exhaust System ...... 117 Cooling System ...... 176 Warning Light ...... 62 Exterior Lights ...... 29, 119 Coolant Capacity ...... 212 Emergency Brake ...... 124 256 Filters Fuel ...... 211 Switch ...... 29 Air Conditioning ...... 38, 181 Adding ...... 140 Head Restraints ...... 27 Engine Oil ...... 212 Additives ...... 211 Heated Mirrors...... 29 Flashers Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...... 140 Heated Seats...... 23 Hazard Warning ...... 148 Gasoline ...... 211 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Turn Signal ...... 66, 119, 150, 151 Materials Added ...... 211 Switch ...... 30 Flash-To-Pass ...... 30 Octane Rating ...... 211, 212 Hill Descent Control ...... 78 Flooded Engine Starting ...... 122 Requirements ...... 212 Hill Descent Control Indicator ...... 78 Fluid, Brake ...... 213 Specifications ...... 212 Hill Start Assist ...... 72 Fluid Capacities ...... 212 Tank Capacity ...... 212 Hood Prop ...... 51 Fluid Leaks ...... 119 Fueling ...... 140 Hood Release ...... 51 Fluid Level Checks Fuses ...... 151 Brake ...... 177 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...... 17 Engine Oil ...... 176 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . .67, 140, 141 Information Center, Vehicle ...... 58 Manual Transmission ...... 186 Gasoline (Fuel)...... 211 Instrument Cluster ...... 66 Fluids And Lubricants ...... 212 Gear Ranges ...... 127 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning.....206 Fog Lights ...... 30, 150 Gear Select Lever Override ...... 163 Integrated Power Module (Fuses).....152 Fog Light Service ...... 150 Glass Cleaning ...... 207 Interior Appearance Care...... 205 Fold And Tumble Rear Seat ...... 26 GPS Navigation (Uconnect GPS) .....235 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ....31 Folding Rear Seat ...... 23, 24 Introduction ...... 1 Four-Way Hazard Flasher...... 148 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 148 Inverter Outlet (115V) ...... 55 Four Wheel Drive ...... 132 Headlights Inverter, Power...... 55 Operation ...... 132 Automatic ...... 30 iPod/USB/MP3 Control Shifting ...... 132 Bulb Replacement ...... 149 Bluetooth Streaming Audio ...... 248 Systems ...... 132 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .30 Four Wheel Drive Operation ...... 132 Passing ...... 30 Jacking Instructions ...... 157 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...... 163 Replacing ...... 149 Jack Operation .....156, 157, 158, 186 257 Jump Starting ...... 160 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 148 Maintenance Schedule...... 170 Headlights ...... 29, 149 Malfunction Indicator Light Key, Programming ...... 18 Headlight Switch ...... 29 (Check Engine)...... 63

INDEX Key, Replacement...... 17 High Beam ...... 30 Manual, Service ...... 253 Keys ...... 13 High Beam/Low Beam Select .....30 Manual Transmission ...... 126, 186 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...... 17 Hill Descent Control Indicator .....78 Fluid Level Check ...... 186 Instrument Cluster ...... 29 Lubricant Selection ...... 186, 213 Lane Change Assist...... 31 Malfunction Indicator Shift Speeds ...... 127 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 89 (Check Engine) ...... 63 Media Center Radio...... 224 Latches ...... 119 Passing ...... 30 Memory Feature (Memory Seat) ...... 23 Hood ...... 51 Rear Servicing ...... 151 Memory Seat...... 23 Leaks, Fluid ...... 119 Rear Tail Lamps ...... 151 Memory Seats And Radio ...... 23 Life Of Tires ...... 198 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 62 Mirrors ...... 29 Light Bulbs ...... 119, 148 Security Alarm ...... 62 Heated ...... 29 Lights ...... 119 Service ...... 148, 149 Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...... 80 AirBag...... 60, 95, 117 Side Marker ...... 151 Mopar ...... 214 Automatic Headlights ...... 30 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . .64 Mopar Accessories ...... 214 Back-Up ...... 151 Traction Control ...... 76 Mopar Parts ...... 252 Brake Assist Warning ...... 76 Turn Signal . . .30, 66, 119, 150, 151 Brake Warning ...... 60 Warning (Instrument Cluster Navigation ...... 233 Bulb Replacement ...... 148, 149 Description) ...... 66 Navigation System (Uconnect GPS) . . .234 Center Mounted Stop ...... 151 Loading Vehicle Navigation Voice Prompt Volume .....233 Cruise ...... 66 Tires ...... 192 New Vehicle Break-In Period ...... 124 Daytime Running ...... 30 Locking Axle ...... 135 Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...... 30 Lug Nuts ...... 210 Occupant Restraints ...... 87 Exterior ...... 119 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . .211, 212 Fog ...... 30, 150 Maintenance Free Battery ...... 180 Oil Change Indicator ...... 60 258 Oil Change Indicator, Reset ...... 60 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...... 93 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 88 Oil, Engine ...... 212 Preparation For Jacking ...... 157 Remote Control Capacity ...... 212 Pretensioners Starting System ...... 15 Change Interval ...... 60 Seat Belts ...... 93 Remote Sound System (Radio) Dipstick ...... 176 Controls ...... 240 Filter ...... 212 Radial Ply Tires ...... 197 Remote Starting System ...... 15 Pressure Warning Light ...... 62 Radio Replacement Bulbs ...... 148 Recommendation ...... 212 Presets ...... 219, 222, 227 Replacement Keys ...... 17 Viscosity ...... 212 Radio 130 Replacement Tires ...... 198 Oil Pressure Light ...... 62 Operating Instructions Reporting Safety Defects...... 252 Onboard Diagnostic System ...... 66 Radio Mode ...... 218 Resetting Oil Change Indicator ...... 60 Operating Precautions ...... 66 Radio 130 With Satellite Radio Restraint, Head ...... 27 Outlet Operating Instructions Restraints, Child...... 102 Power ...... 52 Radio Mode ...... 221 Roll Over Warning...... 2 Overheating, Engine ...... 162 Radio Frequency Rotation, Tires ...... 203 Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . .253 General Information ...... 13, 16, 18 Radio Operation ...... 219, 222 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...... 117 Parking Brake ...... 124 Rear Seat, Folding ...... 23 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...... 119 Pets ...... 116 Rear Swing Gate ...... 51 Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 252 Phone (Uconnect) ...... 242 Rear Wiper/Washer ...... 32 Safety, Exhaust Gas...... 117 Placard, Tire And Loading Recreational Towing...... 144 Safety Information, Tire ...... 187 Information ...... 192 Shifting Into Transfer Case Safety Tips ...... 116 Power Neutral (N) ...... 145 Schedule, Maintenance ...... 170 Inverter ...... 55 Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Seat Belt Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . .52 Neutral (N) ...... 146 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Windows ...... 38 Refrigerant ...... 181 Anchorage ...... 92 Power Steering Fluid ...... 213 Release, Hood ...... 51 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . .94 259 Energy Management Feature ...... 93 Fold And Tumble Rear ...... 26 Signals, Turn.....30, 66, 119, 150, 151 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ...... 90 Heated ...... 23 Sirius Satellite Radio ...... 235 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 89 Memory ...... 23 Sirius Travel Link ...... 235

INDEX Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .....91 Rear Folding ...... 23, 24 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...... 203 Pregnant Women ...... 93 Removal ...... 26 Snow Tires ...... 200 Seat Belt Extender ...... 92 Seatback Release ...... 23 Spare Tire...... 156, 200, 201 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 93 Tilting ...... 23 Spark Plugs ...... 212 Seat Belt Reminder ...... 88 Vented ...... 23 Specifications Seat Belt Maintenance ...... 205 Ventilated ...... 23 Fuel (Gasoline) ...... 212 Seat Belt Reminder...... 88 Security Alarm ...... 19, 62 Oil...... 212 Seat Belts ...... 88, 117 Security System ...... 19 Speed Control Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...... 92 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze).....212 Accel/Decel ...... 139 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ...... 17 Cancel ...... 139 Anchorage ...... 92 Sentry Key Programming ...... 18 Resume ...... 139 Child Restraint ...... 102 Sentry Key Replacement ...... 17 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 137 Extender ...... 92 Service Assistance ...... 250 Starting ...... 15, 122 Front Seat ...... 88, 89, 90 Service Contract ...... 251 Automatic Transmission ...... 122 Inspection ...... 117 Service Manuals ...... 253 Cold Weather ...... 122 Operating Instructions ...... 90 Shifting ...... 129 Engine Fails To Start ...... 122 Pregnant Women ...... 93 Automatic Transmission ...... 129 Manual Transmission ...... 122 Pretensioners ...... 93 Manual Transmission ...... 126 Remote ...... 15 Rear Seat ...... 89 Transfer Case, Shifting Into Starting And Operating...... 122 Reminder ...... 62 Transfer Case Neutral (N) ...... 145 Starting Procedures...... 122 Untwisting Procedure ...... 91 Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Steering...... 29 Seats ...... 23 Transfer Case Neutral (N) ...... 146 Tilt Column ...... 29 Adjustment ...... 23 Shift Lever Override...... 163 Wheel, Tilt ...... 29 Easy Entry ...... 23, 25 Shoulder Belts...... 89 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...... 240 260 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . .80 Trailer And Tongue Weight ...... 141 System Controls ...... 240 Pressure Warning Light ...... 64 Trailer Towing Guide ...... 141 Storage, Vehicle ...... 37 Quality Grading ...... 204 Trailer Weight ...... 141 Stuck, Freeing ...... 163 Radial ...... 197 Transaxle Supplemental Restraint System - Replacement ...... 198 Autostick ...... 131 AirBag...... 96 Rotation ...... 203 Transfer Case Sway Bar Disconnect, Electronic .....136 Safety ...... 187, 195 Fluid ...... 213 Sway Control, Trailer ...... 78 Sizes ...... 188 Four-Wheel-Drive Operation .....132 Swing Gate, Rear ...... 51 Snow Tires ...... 200 Transmission System, Remote Starting ...... 15 Spare Tire ...... 156, 200, 201 Automatic ...... 130, 178 Spinning ...... 197 Fluid ...... 213 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . .37 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 198 Maintenance ...... 178 Tilt Steering Column ...... 29 Wheel Nut Torque ...... 210 Manual ...... 126 Tire And Loading Information Placard . .192 Tire Safety Information ...... 187 Shifting ...... 129 Tire Markings...... 187 To Open Hood ...... 51 Transporting Pets ...... 116 Tires...... 119, 195, 200, 204 Touchscreen Radio Tread Wear Indicators...... 198 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 198 Cleaning Your Touchscreen Radio . .233 Turn Signals...... 30, 66, 150, 151 Air Pressure ...... 195 Tow Hooks, Emergency ...... 166 Chains ...... 203 Towing ...... 141, 164 UCI Connector ...... 241 Changing ...... 156, 186 Disabled Vehicle ...... 164 Uconnect Voice Command...... 245 Compact Spare ...... 200 Recreational ...... 144 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...... 204 General Information ...... 195, 200 Weight ...... 141 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) High Speed ...... 196 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . .144 Connector ...... 241 Inflation Pressures ...... 196 Trac-Lok Rear Axle ...... 135 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ...... 91 Jacking ...... 156, 158, 186 Traction Control ...... 73 Life Of Tires ...... 198 Trailer Sway Control (TSC)...... 78 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . .210 Load Capacity ...... 192 Trailer Towing ...... 141 Vehicle Loading ...... 192 261 Vehicle Storage ...... 37 Warranty Information ...... 252 Fluid ...... 177 Voice Command ...... 245 Washers, Windshield ...... 177 Windshield Wiper Blades ...... 183 Voice Prompt Volume Wheel And Wheel Trim ...... 201 Windshield Wipers ...... 31 Navigation ...... 233 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care...... 201 Wiper Blade Replacement ...... 183 Volume Wind Buffeting ...... 39 Wiper, Rear...... 32 Navigation Voice Prompt ...... 233 Window Fogging...... 37 Windows Warning Lights (Instrument Power ...... 38 Cluster Description) ...... 63 Windshield Defroster ...... 118 Warning, Roll Over ...... 2 Windshield Washers ...... 31, 177

262 263 264 This guide has been prepared to help you get Driving and Alcohol quickly acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of source for common questions. However, it is not a collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with substitute for your Owner’s Manual. blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking For complete operational instructions, maintenance driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. procedures and important safety messages, please consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect WARNING! manuals found on the website on the back cover The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your Important vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, and other Warning Labels in your vehicle. resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and Get warranty and other information online – you can recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any Not all features shown in this guide may apply your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual, device or feature that may take their attention off the road. to your vehicle. For additional information on Never drink and then drive. Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada) www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious or your local Jeep® brand dealer. www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable done while the vehicle is moving. year, make and model of your vehicle. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.

3147069_18a_Jeep_Wrangler_JK_UG_091517.indd 2 10/5/17 1:56 PM Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next

Jeep.com (U.S.) Jeep.ca (Canada)

*Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water. Please check the “Driving Through Water” section for more information.

3147069_18a_Jeep_Wrangler_JK_UG_091517.indd 1 10/5/17 1:56 PM